2008 Chevrolet Express Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using this Manual
{CAUTION:
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
is done, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, refer
to the DURAMAX® Diesel supplement for additional
and specific information on this engine.
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
Index
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do Not do this”
or “Do Not let this happen.”
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. A
box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things
that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the
warning.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release
the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure
the seat is locked in place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Seat
Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has front power seat(s), you can adjust
them with these controls located at the front center
of the seat cushion.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
To raise or lower the seat, move the center knob up or
down. To move the seat forward or rearward, move
the center knob toward the right or left.
To raise or lower the front of the seat cushion, move the
right lever up or down. To raise or lower the rear of
the seat cushion, move the left lever up or down.
The seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The lever
used to operate them is located on the inboard side
of the seats.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not
at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
Removing the Rear Seat
Disconnect the quick release latch plates for the
lap-shoulder belts on the bench seat to be removed.
1. To do this, press the
tip of a key into the
release hole of
the safety belt buckle
while pulling up on
the safety belt.
Three Passenger Seat Shown
The driver’s side pin has a gray cap with a
black “L” marked on it.
2. Locate the pins.
On a three passenger seat there are two pins
located on the inboard sides of the rear seats.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pull the pin handle up to disengage the pin from
the retaining clip, then pull the pin out.
4. Repeat this procedure for the other pins.
5. Pull the seat rearward about 2 inches (5 cm) and
then lift the seat from the floor rails.
6. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
7. For the first row rear
seat, stow the safety
belt latch by attaching
the clip on the
safety belt latch to the
trim just inside the
side door.
Three Passenger Seat Shown
The passenger’s side pin has a black cap with a
white “R” marked on it.
On a four passenger seat, each half of the seat has
a set of pins. The driver’s side has a set marked
“L”, and the passenger’s side has a set marked “R”.
For the remaining rear seats, stow the safety belt
latch plate on the clip at the window trim.
If the vehicle has floor mats, the pins will be
located under a flap that has been cut into the mat.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Position the seat into the open slots in both rails.
Push the seat forward in the rail, hooking both
seat bases onto the pins inside of the rails.
Replacing the Rear Seats
2. To install the locking pins at the rear of the seat
base, locate the hole in the rail for the pin. If the
vehicle has floor mats, pull the flap that has
been cut into the mat.
{CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place properly
can move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
3. Insert the locking pins into the seat base and push
the seat to line up the pins with the base.
On a three passenger seat, the pin with the black
cap marked “R” must be installed on the
passenger’s side and the pin with the gray cap
marked “L” on the driver’s side.
On a four passenger seat, the pins marked “R” must
be installed on the half of the seat on the passenger’s
side. The pins marked “L” must be installed on the
half of the seat on the driver’s side.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three Passenger Seat Shown
Three Passenger Seat Shown
4. Push the pin(s) marked “R” down until they are in
the retaining clip.
5. Push the pin(s) marked “L” down until they are in
the retaining clip.
6. If the vehicle has a floor mat, put the flap back to
its original position.
7. Repeat this procedure for the other seat base.
8. Connect the quick-release latch plates for the
lap-shoulder belts by inserting the latch plates
into the buckles attached at the outboard positions
of the bench seat. Do not twist the belt.
9. Check that all locking pins are locked into place
before operating the vehicle.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
from it and be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger(s) are
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
restrained properly too.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and snug on the
hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be
sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt. The
belt force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a lap-shoulder
belt. If you are using a rear seating position with a
detachable safety belt and the safety belt is not
instruction on reconnecting the safety belt to the
mini-buckle.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you
can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in
the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the
belt go back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
To move it down, pull on
the center adjuster control
labeled PULL. You can
move the height adjuster
up just by pushing up
on the shoulder belt guide.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The
belt should go back out of the way. When the safety
belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safety belt
webbing. The latch plate should rest on the stitching
on the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.
After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pushing in to make sure it
has locked into position.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) of your
vehicle is below 8,500 lb (3 855 kg) then your vehicle
has safety belt pretensioners for the front occupants.
You can find the GVWR on the certification label on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. See Loading Your
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seats. Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
Although you cannot see them, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner activation are met. And, if
your vehicle has side impact airbags, safety belt
pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side
crash or a rollover event.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
1. Locate the guide in a pocket on the side of the
seatback.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described in previously in this section. Make
sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guide. Slide the guide into its storage pocket on the
side of the seatback.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use
it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The
extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for
securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
{CAUTION:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It
should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The
child might slide under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly
can strike other people, or can be thrown out of
the vehicle. In addition, young children should not use
the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need to use a
child restraint.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
People should never hold an infant in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. An infant does
not weigh much — until a crash. During a
crash an infant will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at
only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant
will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if
a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never
leave children unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the safety belts.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
should always be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children should always be secured in
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
appropriate child restraints.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{CAUTION:
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Because there are different
systems, it is important to refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint. Make
sure the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that restraint.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
CAUTION: (Continued)
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
system detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is turned
off. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if the
airbag is off.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
{CAUTION:
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system or
the airbag off switch is designed to turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag if the
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and
its attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Lower Anchors
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether strap and anchor.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint.
Top Tether Anchor
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Second, Third and
Fourth Row with Three
Passenger Seat
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See the information following for installing a child
restraint with a top tether in the second, third and fourth
row center positions.
Do not install three child restraints in the same row at
the same time and never install two top tethers using the
same top tether anchor.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
Second, Third and Fourth Row with Three Passenger
Seat — Passenger Van
There are two top tether anchors in the second, third
and fourth rows. To install a child restraint in the
rear driver side seating positions, use anchor point (A).
To install a child restraint in the rear passenger side
seating positions, use anchor point (B). To install a child
restraint in the rear center seating positions, use
anchor point (B). Never install two top tethers using the
same top tether anchor.
Front Passenger
Position
The second, third and fourth row with three passenger
seats have exposed metal lower anchors located in
the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this
manual.
Front Passenger Position
There is a top tether anchor for the front passenger
position with a front passenger seat. The anchor
is located at the rear of the seat cushion on the right
front passenger’s seat.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Secure any unused safety belts behind the
child restraint so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child
restraint manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt
assembly may cause damage to these parts. Make
sure when securing unused safety belts behind
the child restraint that there is no contact between
the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and
the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the
seat. When removing the child restraint, always
remember to return the safety belts to their normal,
stowed position before folding the rear seat.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
2.3. Route and tighten the top tether according to
your child restraint instructions and the
following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. For the second, third and fourth row with
three passenger seats only, in the rear
driver side seating positions, use anchor
point (A). For the rear passenger side seating
positions, use anchor point (B). For the
center seating positions, use anchor
point (B). Never install two top tethers using
the same top tether anchor.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
using has an integrated
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
around the headrest or
head restraint.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
page 1-39 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
tether anchor locations.
If the position you are
using has an integrated
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the headrest or
head restraint.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-38.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors
more information.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
{CAUTION:
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position (With
Passenger Sensing System)
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions. See
more information on this, including important safety
information.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
for additional information.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
page 1-39 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
tether anchor locations.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
page 3-31.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. If your vehicle does not have a rear seat and your
child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
information.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remove any additional material from the seat such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position (With
Airbag Off Switch)
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer/retailer. If no rear seat is
available, do not install a child restraint in this vehicle
and check with your dealer/retailer.
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
There is a switch on the instrument panel that you can
use to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
this, including important safety information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the airbag, it means
that something may be wrong with the airbag
system. The right front passenger’s airbag
could inflate even though the switch is off. If
this ever happens, do not let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a
member of a passenger airbag risk group sit in
the right front passenger’s position (for
example, do not secure a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger’s seat)
until you have your vehicle serviced. See
including important safety information.
Even though the airbag off switch is designed
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
page 1-39 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
tether anchor locations.
If you have no other choice but to install a
rear-facing child restraint in this seat, make sure
the airbag is off once the child restraint has
been installed.
When the airbag off switch has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
in the airbag off light should light and stay lit when
page 3-30.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
If you had turned the airbag off with the switch,
remember to be sure to use the airbag off switch to turn
on the right front passenger’s airbag when you remove
the child restraint from the vehicle unless the person
who will be sitting there is a member of a passenger
{CAUTION:
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
If the right front passenger’s airbag is turned
off for a person who is not in a risk group
identified by the national government, that
person will not have the extra protection of an
airbag. In a crash, the airbag will not be able to
inflate and help protect the person sitting there.
7. If your vehicle does not have a rear seat and your
child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
information.
Do not turn off the passenger’s airbag unless
the person sitting there is in a risk group
identified by the national government. See
including important safety information.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver, passenger seated
directly behind the driver, and the third row
outboard passenger position (passenger van
equipped with a sliding or hinged door).
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbag:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger,
passenger seated directly behind the right front
passenger, and the third row outboard passenger
position (passenger van equipped with a
hinged door).
Your vehicle may have the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver (cargo van).
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger
position (cargo or passenger van equipped
with a sliding door).
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
If you have a passenger van with a right front
passenger roof-rail airbag and a sliding door, you
will also have a separate roof-rail airbag for
the passenger seated directly behind the right front
passenger and the third row outboard passenger
position.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
If your vehicle has rollover capable roof-rail
airbags, they are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle and in the event of
a vehicle rollover. They are not designed to
inflate in frontal or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can
be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you
would be if you were sitting on the edge of
your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help
keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
There is an airbag
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with roof-rail airbags.
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle is a cargo or passenger van with a
sliding door and it has a roof-rail airbag for the driver
and right front passenger position, the roof-rail airbags
are in the ceiling above the side window.
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, passengers behind the driver and right
front passenger, and the third row outboard passengers,
the roof-rail airbags are in the ceiling above the side
windows. On the driver’s side of the vehicle, there is one
single roof-rail airbag for either vehicles with a hinged
door or a sliding door.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For passenger vans with a sliding door, on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle, you will have a separate
roof-rail airbag for the passenger seated directly
behind the right front passenger and the third row
outboard passenger position.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do
not put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie down through any door
or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In addition, your vehicle may have dual-stage frontal
airbags. Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint
according to crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic
frontal sensors, which help the sensing system
distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a
more severe frontal impact. For moderate frontal
impacts, dual-stage airbags inflate at a level less than
full deployment. For more severe frontal impacts,
full deployment occurs.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags. See
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate during a rollover. Roof-rail airbags will inflate if
the crash severity is above the system’s designed
threshold level. The threshold level can vary with
specific vehicle design.
Single Stage vs. Dual Stage Airbags
Depending on the weight of your vehicle, you will have
either “Single Stage Airbags” or “Dual Stage Airbags.”
Vehicles that have a passenger sensing system
also have dual stage airbags. See Passenger Airbag
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts, or rear impacts. All
roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side of the
vehicle is struck.
If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) of your
vehicle is 8,500 lb (3 855 kg) or above, your vehicle may
have single stage airbags. If the GVWR is below
8,500 lb (3 855 kg) then your vehicle may have dual
stage airbags. You can find the GVWR on the
certification label on the rear edge of the driver’s door.
information.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity of
the side impact.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help
contain the head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the first, second, and third
rows, if equipped. The rollover capable roof-rail
airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or
partial ejection in rollover events, although no system
can prevent all such ejections.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing
the bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The
inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of
the airbag module.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling
of the vehicle, near the side windows for the first,
second, and third rows (if equipped). See Where Are
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some
components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags
distribute the force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn
the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
{CAUTION:
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in
the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma
or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon
as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by
opening a window or a door. If you experience
breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical
attention.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This switch should only be turned to airbag OFF if the
person in the right front passenger’s position is a
member of a passenger risk group identified by the
national government as follows:
Airbag Off Switch
If your instrument panel has one of the switches
pictured in the following illustrations, your vehicle has an
airbag on-off switch that you can use to manually turn
on or off the right front passenger’s airbag.
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must
ride in the front seat because:
• My vehicle has no rear seat;
• My vehicle has a rear seat too small to
accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or
• The infant has a medical condition which, according
to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
• My vehicle has no rear seat;
United States
Canada
• Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear
seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to
12 sometimes must ride in the front because no
space is available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle;
or
If your vehicle does not have an airbag on-off switch, it
may have a passenger sensing system. See Passenger
• The child has a medical condition which, according
to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Medical Condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his or
her physician:
• Causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk
for the passenger; and
• Makes the potential harm from the passenger
airbag in a crash greater than the potential
harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard
or windshield in a crash.
United States
Canada
{CAUTION:
To turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag,
insert your ignition key into the switch, push in,
and move the switch to the off position.
If the right front passenger’s airbag is turned
off for a person who is not in a risk group
identified by the national government, that
person will not have the extra protection of an
airbag. In a crash, the airbag will not be able to
inflate and help protect the person sitting there.
Do not turn off the passenger’s airbag unless
the person sitting there is in a risk group.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The airbag off light will come on to let you know that the
right front passenger’s airbag is off. The airbag off
light will stay on to remind you that the airbag is off. See
stay on to remind you that the airbag is off. The
right front passenger’s airbag will remain off until you
turn it back on again.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the airbag, it means
that something may be wrong with the airbag
system. The right front passenger’s airbag
could inflate even though the switch is off. If
this ever happens, do not let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a
member of a passenger airbag risk group sit in
the right front passenger’s position (for
example, do not secure a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger’s seat)
until you have your vehicle serviced. See
additional information.
United States
Canada
To turn the right front passenger’s airbag on again,
insert your ignition key into the switch, push in,
and move the switch to the on position. The right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is now enabled (may
information.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, will
page 3-31.
Passenger Sensing System
If your instrument panel has one of the indicators
pictured in the following illustrations, your vehicle has a
passenger sensing system unless there is an airbag
off switch located on the instrument panel. If there is an
airbag off switch, your vehicle does not have a
page 1-66 for more information.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
United States
Canada
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on
the instrument panel when you start your vehicle.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
{CAUTION:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position (With Passenger Sensing System) in
the Index.
seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any additional
material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions,
seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers and ask
the person to place the seatback in the fully upright
position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes. This will allow the
system to detect that person and then enable the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and
check with your dealer/retailer. If no rear seat is
available, do not install a child restraint in this vehicle,
and check with your dealer/retailer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-29 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
page 1-74 for more information about modifications that
can affect how the system operates.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
page 7-15.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
operation of the passenger sensing system.
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
1-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of
the passenger sensing system. This could either
prevent proper deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s).
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the airbag system.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, your vehicle may have a passenger
sensing system for the right front passenger’s
position, which includes sensors that are part of the
passenger’s seat. The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the original seat
trim is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or
trim, or with GM covers, upholstery or trim
designed for a different vehicle. Any object, such as
an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing
pad or device, installed under or on top of the
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
1-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-29 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do
not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are
any opened or broken airbag covers, have the
airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For
the location of the airbag modules, see What
dealer/retailer for service.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or
frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any crash
may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used
at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
1-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all door locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, call Roadside
Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 7-6.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter does not
work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle
for the transmitter to work, try this:
If the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If enabled through the DIC, the horn will chirp when Q
is pressed again within five seconds of the previous
press of the lock button. See DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-60 for additional information.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked from
about 3 feet (1 m) up to 65 feet (20 m) away with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
W (Unlock): Press W to unlock the drivers door. If
W is pressed again within five seconds, all remaining
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
doors will unlock.
The interior lamps will come on and stay on for
20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If enabled
through the DIC, the parking lamps will flash twice
to indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC Vehicle
j (Cargo Door): Press j to unlock only the
cargo doors.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and
release L to locate your vehicle. The turn signal lamps
will flash and the horn will sound three times.
Press and hold L for more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps will flash
and the horn will sound repeatedly for 30 seconds.
The alarm will turn off when the ignition is moved
Q (Lock): Press Q to lock all doors.
to ON/RUN or L is pressed again. The ignition must
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the parking lamps will flash once to indicate locking
has occurred.
be in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter
is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased
through your dealer/retailer. All transmitters need to be
re-coded to match the new transmitter. The lost
transmitter will no longer work after the new transmitters
are re-coded. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it. See “Relearn Remote
for instructions on how to match RKE transmitters
to your vehicle.
Battery Replacement
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter:
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See
“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC
information.
1. Separate the halves of the transmitter with a flat,
thin object inserted into the notch on the side of
the transmitter.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
4. Put the transmitter back together tightly.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
If your vehicle is equipped with keyless entry, see
more information.
Door Locks
From the outside, use your key.
{CAUTION:
To lock the door from the
inside, slide the manual
lever on your door down.
To unlock the door, slide
the manual lever up.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
Power Door Locks
You can program this feature using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DELAY DOOR LOCK
On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are
located on the doors.
T: Press the bottom of the switch to lock all the doors
at once. Press the top of the switch to unlock all the
doors at once.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
When a door is locked, the inside door handle will
not work.
Your vehicle is programmed so that when the doors are
closed, the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved
out of PARK (P), all the doors will lock. The front doors
will remain unlocked from inside the vehicle. The
doors will unlock every time you stop the vehicle and
move the shift lever back into PARK (P).
Cargo Door Relocking
If the side cargo door is open when the lock button is
pressed on the door or the remote keyless entry
transmitter, all doors will lock except the cargo door.
The Cargo door will only lock when they are closed or
when the delayed locking feature functions.
If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors are
locked, have that person use the manual lever or
power door lock switch for the rear doors. When the
door is closed again, it will not lock automatically. Use
the manual lever or the power door lock switch to
lock the door.
Delayed Locking
When locking the doors with the power lock switch and
a door open, the doors will lock five seconds after
the last door is closed. You will hear three chimes to
signal that the delayed locking feature is in use.
The power door locks can be programmed through
prompts displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). These prompts allow you to choose
various lock and unlock settings. For more information
page 3-60.
Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lock button
on the RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed
locking feature and immediately lock all the doors.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the 60/40 side
Automatic Door Lock
swing-out door, move the
button to the right for
the driver’s side door or to
the left for the passenger’s
side door to engage the
security feature.
The doors will automatically lock when the shift lever is
moved out of PARK (P). The automatic door locking
feature cannot be disabled.
Automatic Door Unlock
The vehicle doors with automatically unlock when the
shift lever is moved into PARK (P).
The automatic unlock feature can be disabled or
programmed in different ways if the vehicle has an
automatic transmission. See DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-60 for more information.
60/40 Swing-Out Side
Door; Driver’s Side
Shown, Passenger’s
Side Similar
Rear Door Security Locks
Security locks are located on the front portion of the
60/40 side swing-out door, or the side sliding door.
Move the button to the left for the driver’s side door or
to the right for the passenger’s side door to return
the door locks to normal operation.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the side sliding door,
move the button up to
engage the security
feature. Move the button
down to return the
door locks to normal
operation.
Sliding Side Door
Side Sliding Door
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking your key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door
is open.
To open the sliding side door from the outside, pull the
handle toward the rear of the vehicle and slide the
door open.
If the power lock switch is pressed when either the
driver’s, passenger’s, or rear door is open, all the doors
will lock and then the driver’s door will unlock. This
feature does not include the side cargo door.
To close the sliding side door from the outside, use the
handle to slide the door toward the front of the vehicle.
When the door is closed, it will be flush with the side of
the body.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60/40 Swing-Out Side Door
To open the sliding side door from the inside, turn the
handle upward and toward the rear of the vehicle. Then,
slide the door toward the rear of the vehicle.
To open the front portion of a 60/40 door from the
outside, pull out on the handle and pull the door
toward you.
To close the sliding side door from the inside, grasp the
handle and slide the door toward the front of the vehicle.
Make sure the door is completely closed before
driving away.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open the front portion of a 60/40 door from the
inside, pull the handle toward you and push open
the door.
To open the rear portion of a 60/40 door from the
outside, pull the handle on the side of the rear door and
pull the door toward you.
To close the 60/40 side doors, close the rear door first.
Then close the front door. Check to make sure that
both doors are completely closed.
The front side swing-out door has a check strap
assembly in the door frame to keep the door from
opening beyond 90 degrees.
To open the door beyond 90 degrees, close the door
partially, pull the check strap toward you and then open
the door. When you close the door, the check strap
will automatically re-engage.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open the rear doors from the outside, pull the handle
toward you to open the passenger side rear door first.
Rear Doors
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
To open the driver side rear door, pull the latch release
at the inside edge of the door.
To close the rear doors, close the driver side rear door
first. Then, close the passenger side rear door.
Check to make sure both doors are completely closed.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Windows
CAUTION: (Continued)
To operate your manual windows, turn the hand crank
on each door to raise or lower your side door windows.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
Power Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome from extreme heat in
warm or hot weather and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have power
windows, the controls are
located on each of the
side doors.
Express-Down
The driver and front passenger window switches also
has an express-down feature that allows the window to
be lowered without holding the switch. Press fully
and release the side of the window switch marked AUTO
to activate the express-down mode. This mode can
be cancelled at any time by pulling up on the switch. To
open the window part way, lightly tap the switch until
the window is at the desired position.
The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger window
also. Your power windows will work when the ignition has
been turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
Press the switch with to lower the window.
Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the
window.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Swing-Out Windows
Rear Swing-Out Windows
Side Swing-Out Window
Your vehicle also has rear swing-out windows.
The rear swing-out windows work the same way as the
side swing out window, but the latch is located at the
bottom edge of the window.
To open the side door swing-out window, pull up on the
latch at the edge of the window. Swing the window out
and push down on the latch to lock the window into place.
To close the window, pull the latch toward you and push
down on the latch to lock it.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enhanced Technology Glass
Sun Visors
Your vehicle may be equipped with Enhanced
Technology Glass (ETG). ETG is part of the overall
occupant protection system on passenger vans. ETG
may help to keep passengers sitting next to these fixed
windows from being ejected through the glass in some,
but not in all crashes. Even with this glass, seat belts
must still be worn at all times. For passenger vans, use
only ETG glass approved for your vehicle for replacement
when damaged.
To block out glare, swing down the sun visors. You can
also swing them to the side.
Visor Vanity Mirror
You may have visor vanity mirrors, with or without
lamps. Lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on, if you
have them.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
The following table shows laminated glass location,
based on vehicle model and options.
Vehicle Configuration
ETG Locations
Eight Seat
Passenger Vans
Sliding door forward
window
Sliding door forward
window and rear-most
side windows
Twelve and Fifteen Seat
Passenger Vans
Long Wheelbase
Cargo Vans
Rear-most side windows
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
Your vehicle is equipped with the PASS-Key® III+
(Personalized Automotive Security System)
theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft
deterrent system.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
The system is automatically armed when the key is
removed from the ignition.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s
starter and fuel systems. The starter will not work and
fuel will stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone
using a trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged because of the high number of electrical
key codes.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
If the engine does not start and the security message
comes on, the key may have a damaged transponder.
Turn the ignition off and try again.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the instrument panel PASS
KEY fuse. If the engine still does not start with the
other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle
does start, the first key may be faulty. See your
dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service the
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to learn
the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up
to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. This
procedure is for learning additional keys only. If all the
currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate,
you must see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can
service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys made and
programmed to the system.
To program the new key:
1. Verify the new key has 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed key into the
ignition lock cylinder and start the engine. If the
engine will not start, see your dealer/retailer
for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to
ON/RUN within 10 seconds of removing the
previous key.
The security message will turn off once the key has
been programmed. It may not be apparent that
the security message went on due to how quickly
the key is programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key® III+ key, see your
dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ignition Positions
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
Use the key to turn the
ignition switch to four
different positions.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
To shift out of PARK (P), the ignition must be in
ON/RUN and the regular brake pedal applied.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
A (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned
to LOCK/OFF.
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets you use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the
engine is off.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
Lengthy operation of features such as the radio in the
accessory ignition position may drain the battery
and prevent your vehicle from starting. Do not operate
your vehicle in the accessory ignition position for a
long period of time.
• Audio System
• Power Windows
These features will work when the ignition key is in
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, power to the radio will
continue to work 10 minutes or until the driver’s door is
opened. The power windows will continue to work
for up to 10 minutes or until any door is opened.
C (ON/RUN): This is the position for driving.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if the battery
is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
Starting the Engine
D (START): This position starts the engine.
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
Key In the Ignition
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is an
easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave the
key in the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime
will sound, when you open the driver’s door. Always
remember to remove your key from the ignition and take
it with you. This will lock your ignition and transaxle.
Also, always remember to lock the doors.
To place the transmission in the proper gear:
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position -- this is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not be
able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an
extended period of time.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START for
up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of
the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up
and lubricates all moving parts.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and
transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up
and lubricate all moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the
engine and protects components. If the ignition key
is turned to the START position, and then
released when the engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or
until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not
start and the key is held in START for many
seconds, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds
to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent
gear damage, this system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running. Engine cranking
can be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Regulator
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has a fuel regulator that shuts the fuel off
when the engine reaches 5,600 rpm.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
Engine Coolant Heater
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before
starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the
plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above
0°F (−18°C).
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer/retailer in the area where you will be
parking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you
the best advice for that particular area.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord for the engine coolant heater is located
on the driver’s side of the engine compartment and
is attached to the hose for the power steering
reservoir.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
page 2-29. If you are pulling a trailer, see
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must fully
apply your regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P) with the ignition in RUN.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
on page 4-19.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. It
provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. If you
need more power for passing, and you are:
SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than THIRD (3) without using your brakes. You
can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control
your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but
then you would also want to use your brakes off
and on.
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You may use this feature for reducing torque to the rear
wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle from
a stop on slippery road surfaces.
You will shift down to the next gear and have more
power.
FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than SECOND (2) without using your brakes. You
can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or
mud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the
vehicle is moving forward, the transmission will not shift
into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving.
However it reduces vehicle speed more than DRIVE (D)
without using your brakes. You might choose
THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly,
winding roads, when towing a trailer, so there is
less shifting between gears and when going down a
steep hill.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
You should use THIRD (3) (or, as you need to, a lower
gear) when towing a trailer to minimize heat build-up
and extend the life of your transmission.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While activated, the
indicator light on the
instrument panel will
be on.
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/haul is designed to assist while your vehicle is
pulling a large or heavy load or trailer. Tow/haul is most
useful while pulling such a load in rolling terrain, in
stop-and-go traffic, or when you need improved
low-speed control, such as when parking. The purpose
of the tow/haul mode is to:
• Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts,
Tow/haul mode will turn off automatically when the
ignition is turned off. See Tow/Haul Mode Light
on page 3-43.
• provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy load as when the vehicle is unloaded,
Tow/haul is most effective when the vehicle and trailer
combined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle’s
Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). See “Weight
of the Trailer” later in this section.
• improve control of vehicle speed while requiring
less throttle pedal activity.
Press this button located
to the right of the steering
wheel on the instrument
panel to turn tow/haul
mode on and off.
Driving with tow/haul activated without a heavy load will
cause reduced fuel economy and unpleasant engine
and transmission driving characteristics, but will
not cause damage.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on.
Parking Brake
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the handle, located just above
the parking brake pedal, with the parking brake symbol,
to release the parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Shifting Into PARK (P)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
page 4-28.
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
page 2-28
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling the
shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it
will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The shift lock control system is designed to do the
following:
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
vehicle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle
may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever
out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock. To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into
PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To
• Prevent the ignition key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK (P).
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of PARK (P),
unless the ignition is in ON/RUN and the regular
brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock control system is always functional except
in the case of a dead battery or low voltage (less
than 9 V) battery.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery. See
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Ease the pressure on the shift lever.
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition is RUN. See Automatic Transmission
2. While holding down the brake pedal, push the shift
lever all the way into PARK (P)
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you are still having a problem shifting, then have your
vehicle serviced soon.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
Engine Exhaust
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
{CAUTION:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Engine exhaust and fuel operated heater
exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon
monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death. If your vehicle has a diesel engine and a
fuel operated heater, see “Fuel Operated
Heater (FOH)” in the diesel engine supplement.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set the
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
page 4-28.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors
Mirrors
If your vehicle has these
Manual Rearview Mirror
camper-type mirrors, they
can be adjusted manually
so you can have a
clear view of the objects
behind you.
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up
or down and side to side. The day/night adjustment
allows you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the
lamps behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime use
and pull it for nighttime use.
If you have a cargo van without the rear door glass,
your vehicle may not have an inside rearview mirror.
On the lower portion of each mirror there is an auxiliary
convex mirror that can be adjusted manually to
provide an extended field of view.
Outside Manual Mirror
Adjust the mirrors by pressing the mirror up and down
and left and right so you can see a little of the side
of your vehicle, and have a clear view of objects behind
you. The mirrors can be folded in to enter narrow
passageways.
The mirrors can be manually folded in or out.
On the lower portion of each mirror is an auxiliary
convex mirror. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so
you can see more from the driver’s seat. The auxiliary
convex mirrors can be adjusted manually by pressing
the mirror.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Power Mirrors
Outside Convex Mirror
If the vehicle has power
mirrors, the control is
located on the driver’s
side door.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror may have convex glass. A
convex mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen
from the driver’s seat. It also makes things like other
vehicles, look farther away than they really are.
Select each mirror by turning the knob clockwise for the
passenger’s side mirror or counterclockwise for the
driver’s side mirror. The center position is neutral.
Then, adjust the mirror angle by moving the knob in the
desired direction. The auxiliary convex mirrors can
only be adjusted manually.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Heated Mirrors
Storage Areas
Your vehicle may have a front storage compartment. It
is located at the center of the instrument panel
extension, by the floor. To open the compartment, pull
up on the latch. The compartment will open
automatically.
If your vehicle is equipped
with outside heated
mirrors, they can be
defrosted by pressing the
mirror button located
near the fan control.
Storage compartments may also be included on the
inside of each front door.
An indicator light in the button will light when the outside
heated mirrors are activated.
Your rear window defogger comes on when the outside
heated mirrors are on. If your vehicle has a rear
window defogger, see “Rear Window Defogger” in
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-43
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
O. Tow/Haul Mode Button. See “Tow/Haul Mode” under
P. Accessory Power Outlets/Cigarette Lighter. See
on page 3-19.
page 1-66.
page 3-66.
page 2-35.
page 3-14.
page 3-11. Fast Idle System (If Equipped). See
DURAMAX® Diesel Manual for more information.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
The hazard warning flashers warn others. They also let
the police and other emergency vehicles know you
have a problem.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located on
top of the steering
column.
Horn
Press the horn symbol in the middle of the steering
wheel to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
For vehicles with a tilt steering wheel, it allows you to
lower or raise the steering wheel to give your legs more
room when entering or exiting the vehicle. Do not
adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
The lever is located on the lower left side of the steering
column.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
ignition position the key is in, and even if the key is not
in the ignition.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your vehicle’s
turn signals will not work.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable
level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.
page 3-9.
page 3-9.
on page 3-10.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. The turn signals automatically
flash three times and if the tow-haul mode is active
it flashes six times. Holding the turn signal lever for more
than one second causes the turn signals to flash
continually until the lever is released. The lever returns
by itself when you release it.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or lane change.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
If arrows flash more quickly than normal when a turn or
lane change is signaled, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers may not see your turn signal.
turn or lane change.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs or a blown
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-to-Pass
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON also
appears in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC
the chime and message, move the turn signal lever to
the off position.
This feature allows you to use your high-beam
headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you
want to pass. It works even if your headlamps are off.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, but not so
far that you hear it click.
If your headlamps are off or on low-beam, your
high-beam headlamps will turn on and stay on as long
as you hold the lever toward you and the high-beam
indicator on the instrument panel will come on. Release
the lever to turn the high-beam headlamps off.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
23 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer): To
change the headlamps from low to high beam, pull the
multifunction lever all the way toward you. Then
release it.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wipers are controlled by turning the
band with the wiper symbol.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on.
8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go.
The wipers will stop after one wipe. If more wipes are
needed, hold the band on mist longer.
6 Delay: The wiper speed can be set for a long or short
delay between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain
or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The
closer to the top of the lever, the shorter the delay.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
d (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,
turn the band away from you to the first solid band past
the delay settings position.
Windshield Washer
L (Washer Fluid): There is a paddle marked
with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the
multifunction lever. To spray washer fluid on the
windshield, push the paddle. The wipers will clear
the window and then either stop or return to your
preset speed.
a (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
When driving during the day and the wipers are
activated, the head lamps will automatically turn on after
completing eight wipe cycles.
{CAUTION:
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® system and begins
to limit wheel spin while you are using cruise control, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. See
allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the
cruise control back on.
Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
The cruise control buttons
are located on left side of
the steering wheel.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
T (On/Off): This button can both activate and turn
off the system. The indicator light on the button turns on
when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise
control is off.
When you apply your brakes, cruise control is turned off.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this button to
make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously
set speed.
{CAUTION:
SET − (Set/Coast): Press this button to set the speed
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
or make the vehicle decelerate.
[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruise control
without erasing the set speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
1. Press the cruise control On/Off button.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
will come on after the cruise control has been set to
the desired speed.
3. Press the SET− button located on the steering
wheel and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This shuts off the
cruise control. But you do not need to reset it.
Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
press the +RES button on your steering wheel. The
vehicle will go back to the previous set speed and
stay there.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift
to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down.
Of course, applying the brake takes you out of cruise
control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble
and do not use cruise control on steep hills.
To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:
• Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
wheel until you reach your new desired speed,
then release it.
• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time you do this,
you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Ending Cruise Control
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are three ways to end cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
To reduce your speed while using cruise control:
• Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
wheel until the desired lower speed is reached,
then release it.
• Press the cancel button on the steering wheel.
• Press the On/Off button on the steering wheel.
Erasing Speed Memory
• To slow down in very small amounts, press the SET–
button on the steering wheel briefly. Each time you
do this, the vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
slower.
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, the
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the previous set cruise speed.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
automatically turn on the headlamps at normal
brightness, together with the following:
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamps control
is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
• Parking Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the
following:
It controls the following systems:
• Headlamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• Taillamps
• Parking Lamps
• License Plate Lamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
2 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps together with the following lamps
listed below.
• Parking Lamps
O (Off): Briefly turn the control to this position to turn
off the automatic headlamps and daytime running
lamps (DRL). Briefly turn to this position again to turn
the automatic headlamps or DRL back on.
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position only
works for vehicles that are shifted into the PARK (P)
position.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is
on, the headlamps will turn off automatically 10 minutes
after the ignition is turned off. When the headlamps are
turned on while the vehicle is off, the headlamps will
continue to stay on. To prevent the battery from being
drained, turn the control to the off position.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
A warning chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
while the ignition switch is off and the headlamps are on.
To change the headlamps from low beam to high
beam, push the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
the instrument panel.
The DRL system will come on in daylight when the
following conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
Headlamps on Reminder
• The exterior lamps control is in the AUTO position.
• The shift lever is not in PARK (P).
• The light sensor determines it is daytime.
If a door is open, a reminder chime sounds when the
headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on and
the key is out of the ignition. To turn off the chime,
turn the headlamp switch to off or auto and then back
on, or close and re-open the door. In the auto mode, the
headlamps turn off once the ignition is in LOCK/OFF
or may remain on until the headlamp delay ends,
if enabled in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See
page 3-60.
When the DRL are on, only the DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker, and other lamps will not
be on. The instrument panel will not be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps.
To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior lamp control to the
off position and then release it. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, the transmission must be in the PARK (P)
position, before the DRL can be turned off.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
the vehicle leaves the garage, it takes approximately
30 seconds for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside and the headlamp switch
is in AUTO, the automatic headlamp system will turn on
the headlamps at the normal brightness along with other
lamps such as the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps,
roof marker lamps, and the instrument panel lights. The
radio lights will also be dim.
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the
exterior lamps switch to the off position and then
release. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the
transmission must be in the PARK (P) position, before
the automatic headlamp system can be turned off.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The knob for this feature is located next to the exterior
lamps control.
The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered, or the
system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
D (Instrument Panel Lights): Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim
the instrument panel lights and the radio display.
This only works if the headlamps or parking lamps
are on.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather, or a tunnel. This is normal.
To turn on the dome lamps, with the vehicle doors
closed, turn the knob all the way clockwise.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dome Lamps
Entry/Exit Lighting
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
Your vehicle has an illuminated entry/exit feature.
When a door is opened or the key is removed from the
ignition, the dome lamps will come on if the dome
override button is in the out position.
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the
instrument panel brightness knob, located next to
the exterior lamps control, clockwise to the farthest
position. In this position, the dome lamps remain
on whether a door is opened or closed.
Reading Lamps
For vehicles with reading lamps, press the button
located next to each lamp to turn it on or off.
Dome Lamp Override
Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. To turn each one on or off, press the button
located next to the lamp. The lamps cannot be adjusted.
The dome lamp override button is located next to the
exterior lamps control.
The dome lamp override is used to set the dome lamps
to remain off or come on automatically when a door
is opened.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of
charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance
and extended life of the battery.
E (Dome Lamp Override): Press the button in and
the dome lamps remain off when a door is opened.
Press the button again to return it to the extended
position so that the dome lamps come on when a door
is opened.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in. When the
state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly to
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage
or voltage display on the Driver Information Center (DIC),
you may see the voltage move up or down. This is
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Your vehicle may have two accessory power outlets
located on the instrument panel.
To use the outlet lift the cover. The spring cap cover
closes by itself when the outlet is empty.
normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on the accessory power plugs.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be
spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power
that is needed for very high electrical loads.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, rear
window defogger, climate control fan at high speed,
engine cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery.
It does this by balancing the generator’s output and the
vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase engine idle
speed to generate more power, whenever needed.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome lamps if they are left on
for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is in LOCK.
This will help prevent the battery from running down.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
If your vehicle has this feature it is located in the center
console or on the instrument panel. Pull up on the
ashtray door to open it if it is in the console or pull the
door open it if it is on the instrument panel.
Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle
can be controlled with this system.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
To remove the ashtray, pull it out from the console or
from the slide out door. To reinstall the ashtray,
slide it back to the original position.
To use the cigarette lighter, if the vehicle has one, push
it in all the way, and let go. When it is ready for use,
it will pop back out by itself.
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Do not use the lighter to plug in accessory devices. Use
the power outlets provided.
Temperature Control: Turn the middle knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
direct the airflow inside of the vehicle.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
If your vehicle has air conditioning, your heating/air
conditioning controls will look like this:
9 (Off): This turns the system off.
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of the air
to the instrument panel outlets, then directs most of
the remaining air to the floor outlets. Some air may be
directed toward the windshield.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
needed for the vehicle to cool down and the system
operates more efficiently.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard
outlets (for the side windows) and some air directed to
the windshield.
# (Air Conditioning): This setting will begin to cool
The right knob can also be used to select the defrost
and defog modes. Information on defogging and
defrosting can be found later in this section.
and dehumidify the air inside of the vehicle.
V (Maximum Air Conditioning): Turn the right knob to
V for maximum cooling. This setting cools the air the
fastest, by recirculating the inside air.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Rear Window Defogger
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control is used properly.
There are two modes to clear fog or frost from the
windshield and side windows.
Some vehicles may have a rear window defogger.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to
turn the rear window defogger on or off. Be sure to clear
as much snow from the window as possible.
Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or
moisture and warm the passengers. Use the defrost
mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield more
quickly in extremely cold conditions. For best results,
clear all snow and ice from the windshield before
defrosting.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window and only works
when the ignition is in ON/RUN.
The rear window defogger turns off several minutes
after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the
defogger will run for several more minutes before turning
off. The defogger can also be turned off by pressing
the button again or by turning off the engine.
Turn the knob on the right of the climate control panel
to select the defog or defrost mode. The temperature
knob should be in the red area and the fan control
toward high.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp
object to clear the inside rear window. Do not
adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the
rear glass. These actions may damage the rear
defogger. Repairs would not be covered by
your warranty.
- (Defog): With this setting, the outside air comes
out of both the floor and defroster outlets. Adjust
the temperature knob for warmer or cooler air. The air
conditioning compressor may operate in this setting
to dehumidify the air.
1 (Defrost): This setting operates the defroster.
Most of the air comes out near the windshield,
with some going to the floor outlets and front side
windows. The air conditioning compressor may operate
in this setting to dehumidify the air.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the outlets located near the center and on the sides
of the instrument panel to change the direction of
airflow.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
AUX: The thumbwheel for this system is located in the
switchbank below the audio system.
Rear Heating System
9 (Fan): Turn the thumbwheel up or down to increase
or decrease the amount of heated air sent to the
rear-seating area.
Your vehicle may have a rear heating system that
allows you to adjust the amount of air flowing into the
rear of the vehicle, from the front-seating area. This
feature works with the main climate-control system in
your vehicle.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q (High): Turn the thumbwheel to this position to
supply the most amount of heat to the rear-seating area.
c (Medium): Turn the thumbwheel to this position
to supply half the amount of heat to the rear-seating
area.
R (Low): Turn the thumbwheel to this position to
supply the least amount of heat to the rear-seating area.
Front Climate Control Panel
Use this control panel when you would like to maintain
a separate temperature setting. Adjust the direction
of the airflow or adjust the fan speed for the rear seat
passenger(s).
9 (Off): Turn the thumbwheel to this position to
turn the rear heating system off.
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System
Your vehicle may have a rear heating and
air-conditioning system. This system regulates the
temperature, the fan speed and the air delivery for the
rear-seat passengers only. It also works with the
main climate-control system in your vehicle.
Rear Climate Control Panel
If your vehicle has a 135 inch (343 cm) wheelbase, a
rear control panel for this system is located in the
second row behind the driver in the rear of your vehicle.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear seat passenger can use this control panel to
personally adjust the temperature, the direction of the
airflow and the fan speed for the rear seating area.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the upper outlets,
with a little air directed to the floor outlets.
The fan knob located on the front climate control panel
must be turned to AUX (Auxiliary) to let a rear seat
passenger use the control panel in the rear seating area.
Performing this action disables the front control panel.
To return control to this panel, move the fan knob out
of AUX.
2 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets.
Temperature Control: Turn the right knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature in the rear-seating area.
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed
in the rear-seating area.
The air-conditioning system on the main climate control
panel must be turned on to direct cooled air to the
rear of the vehicle. If it is not on, then the temperature
in the rear of the vehicle remains at cabin temperature.
9: This position turns the system off.
Be sure to keep the area under the front seats clear
of any objects so that the air inside of your vehicle can
circulate effectively.
Mode Control: Turn the center knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow
in the rear seating area.
For information on how to use the main climate control
page 3-22.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
gages and warning lights work together to let you
know when there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays
on when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section
that tells you what to do about it. Please follow
this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly – and even dangerous. So please get to know
your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need to know to drive safely
and economically. If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more
information.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Press the reset button, located on the instrument panel
cluster next to the trip odometer display, to toggle
between the trip odometer and the regular odometer.
Holding the reset button for approximately one second
while the trip odometer is displayed will reset it.
Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. The
digital odometer will read 999,999 if someone tries to
turn it back.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off,
press the reset button.
If your vehicle needs a new odometer installed, it must be
set to the mileage total of the old odometer. If that is not
possible, then it must be set at zero and a label must be
put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading
when the new odometer was installed.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Safety Belt Reminders
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
will sound for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would only
occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
The passenger safety belt light, located on the
instrument panel, will come on and stay on for several
seconds and then flash for several more.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime will come on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt
is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will
come on.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{CAUTION:
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag
sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. The
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you start the engine. If the light does not
come on then, have it fixed immediately. If there is a
problem with the airbag system, an airbag Driver
Information Center (DIC) message may also come on.
more information.
light should go out and the
system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Off Light
{CAUTION:
When you manually turn the right front passenger’s
airbag off using the airbag on-off switch, if equipped, on
the instrument panel, the indicator light OFF or the off
symbol will come on and stay on to remind you that the
airbag has been turned off. This light will go off when you
for more on this, including important safety information.
If the right front passenger’s airbag is turned off
for a person who is not in a risk group identified
by the national government, that person will not
have the extra protection of an airbag. In a
crash, the airbag will not be able to inflate and
help protect the person sitting there.
Do not turn off the passenger’s airbag unless
the person sitting there is in a risk group
identified by the national government. See
including important safety information.
United States
Canada
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system, your
instrument panel will have a passenger airbag status
indicator.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the airbag, it means
that something may be wrong with the airbag
system. The right front passenger’s airbag
could inflate even though the switch is off. If
this ever happens, do not let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a
member of a passenger airbag risk group sit in
the right front passenger’s position (for
example, do not secure a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger’s seat)
until you have your vehicle serviced. See
including important safety information.
United States
Canada
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator will
light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to
let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit, it means that the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may
this, including important safety information.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
for more on this, including important safety information.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
Charging System Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition, but the engine
is not running, as a
check to show you it is
working.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-29 for more on this, including
important safety information.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. A charging system
Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also
for more information. This light could indicate that you
have problems with a generator drive belt, or another
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If
you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
on, this gage shows
the battery’s state of
charge in DC volts.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between the
low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does not
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
Antilock Brake System Warning
Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light will come
on briefly when you
start the engine.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push, or the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
{CAUTION:
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it
is safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving, your
vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do
not have antilock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have antilock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-34
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see
brake related DIC messages.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
If you have the
StabiliTrak® system, this
light will be on or flashing,
according to the
description table for the
StabiliTrak® system.
page 4-5.
United States
Canada
You will hear three chimes if the light turns on and one
chime if the light turns off.
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. It also
provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gage
will read 210°F (100°C) or less. If you are pulling a load
or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If the
gage reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicates
that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
If this light remains on steady, your vehicle needs to be
taken in for service.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC
information.
Tire Pressure Light
This light comes on briefly
when the engine is started.
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to do so.
If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure. See
If a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor
System, this light will flash for approximately
60 seconds and then stay on solid for the remainder of
the ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-66 for more information.
This light will also come on when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by your warranty.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
The check engine light
comes on to indicate that
there is an OBD II
problem and service is
required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on, as a check to show it is working,
when the ignition is turned ON/RUN but the engine is not
running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired.
This light also comes on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the ignition off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and could damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be
required.
If the Light Is On Steady
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
If the Light is Flashing
The following can prevent more serious damage to your
vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. The
condition is usually corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
This will be detected by the system and cause the light to
turn on.
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced the battery or if the
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This can take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have developed.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or other problem causing
low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as possible.
Oil Pressure Gage
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
United States
Canada
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure
in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine
is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oil Pressure Light
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
on page 2-18.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Cruise Control Light
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.
This light comes on
whenever you set the
cruise control.
This light will come on
briefly when you start your
engine. If it does not,
have your vehicle serviced.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil
is not flowing through your engine properly. You
could be low on oil and you might have some other
system problem.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highbeam On Light
Fuel Gage
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
for more information.
United States
Canada
Tow/Haul Mode Light
The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
This light comes on when
the Tow/Haul mode has
been activated.
The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of
fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as
possible.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listed are four situations you may experience with your
fuel gage:
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
All messages will appear in the DIC display located at
the bottom of the instrument panel cluster. The DIC
buttons are located on the instrument panel, next to the
instrument panel cluster.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected.
• The gage does not go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
If your vehicle has these features, the DIC also displays
the compass direction and the outside air temperature
when viewing the trip and fuel information. The compass
direction appears on the top right corner of the DIC
display. The outside air temperature automatically
appears in the bottom right corner of the DIC display. If
there is a problem with the system that controls the
temperature display, the numbers will be replaced with
dashes. If this occurs, have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage.
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
The DIC also allows some features to be customized.
more information.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to display
the oil life, units, tire pressure readings for vehicles
with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), engine
hours, Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
programming for vehicles with the TPMS and without a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, compass
zone and compass calibration on vehicles with
this feature, and RKE transmitter programming.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument
panel, next to the instrument panel cluster.
DIC Buttons
The buttons are the
trip/fuel, vehicle
information, customization,
and set/reset buttons.
The button functions are
detailed in the
U (Customization): Press this button to customize the
feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC.
following pages.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through
the following menu items:
Odometer
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display the
odometer, trip odometers, fuel range, average economy,
fuel used, timer, average speed, and digital tachometer.
Press the trip/fuel button until XX mi (Km) displays. This
display shows the distance the vehicle has been
driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the retro-active reset feature is activated after the
vehicle is started, but before it begins moving, the display
will show the number of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) that
were driven during the last ignition cycle.
Trip Odometers
Press the trip/fuel button until A or B displays. This
display shows the current distance traveled in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for each
trip odometer. Both trip odometers can be used at the
same time.
Fuel Range
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays.
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can
be driven without refueling. The display will show
LOW if the fuel level is low.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by
pressing the set/reset button while the desired trip
odometer is displayed.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to
the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the
vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This
estimate will change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, this display may read one number, but if
the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may
change even though the same amount of fuel is in the
fuel tank. This is because different driving conditions
produce different fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel economy than city driving.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the
set/reset button for at least four seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned
on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles
(8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will
show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the
display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),
5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will be displayed. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW”
for more information.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The timer will record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and
59 seconds (99:59:59) after which the display will return
to zero.
Average Economy
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays.
This display shows the approximate average miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). This
number is calculated based on the number of mpg
(L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menu item
was reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and hold the
set/reset button. The display will return to zero.
To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly while
TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the set/reset
button while TIMER is displayed.
Average Speed
Fuel Used
Press the trip/fuel button until AVERAGE SPEED
displays. This display shows the average speed of the
vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h). This average is calculated based on the
various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of
this value. To reset the value, press and hold the
set/reset button. The display will return to zero.
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED displays.
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this menu
item. To reset the fuel used information, press and hold
the set/reset button while FUEL USED is displayed.
Timer
Digital Tachometer
Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays. This
display can be used as a timer.
Press the trip/fuel button until Tachometer ##00 RPM
displays. This display shows the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (RPM).
To start the timer, press the set/reset button while
TIMER is displayed. The display will show the amount
of time that has passed since the timer was last
reset, not including time the ignition is off. Time will
continue to be counted as long as the ignition is
on, even if another display is being shown on the DIC.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil
Vehicle Information Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll
through the following menu items:
Units
Oil Life
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to select between
ENGLISH or METRIC units.
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate
of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent
with your driving conditions.
Tire Pressure
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the
DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press
the vehicle information button until the DIC displays
FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the
vehicle information button again until the DIC displays
REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC
change the oil as soon as possible. See Engine
engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional
maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for more information.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to
check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the
information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after
each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be
careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any
time other than when the oil has just been changed.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.
Relearn Remote Key
To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P).
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match an
RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
Engine Hours
Press the vehicle information button until ENGINE
HOURS displays. This display shows the total number
of hours the engine has run.
1. Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V
TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
Relearn Tire Positions
Your vehicle may have this display. To access this
display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P). If your vehicle
has the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor, the
system must re-learn the tire positions. To re-learn
page 3-52 for more information.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
Change Compass Zone
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
Your vehicle may have this feature. To change the
page 3-50.
Blank Display
Calibrate Compass
This display shows no information.
Your vehicle may have this feature. The compass can
be manually calibrated. To calibrate the compass
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Compass
Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
Compass Zone
Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone for your
location.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state or
province, it will be necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the zone through the
DIC if the zone is not set correctly.
Compass variance is the difference between the earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the compass
is not set to the zone where you live, the compass may
give false readings. The compass must be set to the
variance zone in which the vehicle is traveling.
2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance
zone number on the map.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is
moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in PARK (P).
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading,
for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC.
Press the vehicle information button until PRESS
5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass.
See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following.
V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
Compass Calibration
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle in
circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate
away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers, or
other industrial structures, if possible.
Compass Calibration Procedure
1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the
compass zone is set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is located. See “Compass
Variance (Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section.
Do not operate any switches such as window,
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during
the calibration procedure.
If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, the
compass should be calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for example,
N for North, or the heading does not change after
making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna
mount, a magnetic emergency light, magnetic note pad
holder, or any other magnetic item. Turn off the
vehicle, move the magnetic item, then turn on the
vehicle and calibrate the compass.
2. Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V
TO CALIBRATE COMPASS displays.
3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass
calibration.
4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in tight circles at
less than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the calibration.
The DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE
for a few seconds when the calibration is complete.
The DIC display will then return to PRESS V
TO CALIBRATE COMPASS.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF
DIC Warnings and Messages
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
more information.
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
more information.
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument
panel to acknowledge that you received the messages
and to clear them from the display.
CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN CIRCLES
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be cleared. You should
take any messages that appear on the display seriously
and remember that clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
This message displays when calibrating the compass.
Drive the vehicle in circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h) to
page 3-50 for more information.
CALIBRATION COMPLETE
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
This message displays when the compass calibration is
information.
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
CARGO DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the cargo
door is open while the ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off
the vehicle and check the cargo door. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the engine oil needs to be
changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure
to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message.
on how to reset the message. See Engine Oil (Gasoline
on page 6-4 for more information.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive
gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstructions, and close the door again. Check to
see if the message still appears on the DIC.
ENGINE HOT A/C
(Air Conditioning) OFF
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor automatically turns off. When
the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air
conditioning compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure
in one or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be
checked. This message also displays LEFT FRONT,
RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to
indicate which tire needs to be checked. You can
receive more than one tire pressure message at a time.
To read the other messages that may have been
sent at the same time, press the set/reset button. If a
tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon
as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set
to those shown on the Tire Loading Information
The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. See
pressure is low, the low tire pressure warning light
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for
operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so to avoid severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating
temperature.
ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL
If your vehicle has an oil level sensor, this message
displays if the oil level in the vehicle is low. Check the oil
level and correct it as necessary. You may need to let the
vehicle cool or warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure
this message clears. See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
on page 5-15 for additional information.
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine
further enters the engine coolant protection mode. See
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
for more information.
This message also displays when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed
to your destination. The performance may be reduced
the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may
be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken
to your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
for more information.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays if the fuel level is low. Refuel as
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a
drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the
door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check
to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
On some vehicles, this message displays and a chime
sounds if the driver side rear door is not fully closed
and the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close
the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
page 3-45 for more information.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
more information.
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter battery is low. The battery needs to be
replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement”
on page 2-4.
This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur.
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do
not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has
been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible
and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
On some vehicles, this message displays and a chime
sounds if the passenger side rear door is not fully
closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn
off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and
close the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC.
On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a
problem with the battery charging system. Under certain
conditions, the charging system light may also turn
on in the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System
drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories.
Have the electrical system checked as soon as
possible. See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE A/C SYSTEM
This message displays when the electronic sensors that
control the air conditioning and heating systems are
no longer working. Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer/retailer if you notice a drop in
heating and air conditioning efficiency.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays along with the brake system
warning light if there is a problem with the brake system.
message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off
the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the
message on the DIC display. If the message is still
displayed or appears again when you begin driving, the
brake system needs service as soon as possible.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your dealer/retailer inspect
the system for problems. See Airbag Readiness Light
information.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak® and this message
displays, it means there may be a problem with the
StabiliTrak® system. If you see this message, try to reset
the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least
15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this message
still comes on, it means there is a problem. You
should see your dealer/retailer for service. The vehicle
is safe to drive, however, you do not have the benefit
of StabiliTrak®, so reduce your speed and drive
accordingly.
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS), this message displays if a part on the
system is not working properly. The tire pressure
light also flashes and then remains on during the same
Several conditions may cause this message to appear.
for more information. If the warning comes on and stays
on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. See your
dealer/retailer.
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
This message displays when there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or may not
restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer before turning off the engine. See
information.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displays
when there is a problem with the Traction Control
System (TCS). When this message displays, the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays when there is a problem with the
transmission. See your dealer/retailer for service.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several conditions that can cause this
message to appear.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
• One condition is overheating, which could occur if
StabiliTrak® activates continuously for an extended
period of time.
STABILITRAK NOT READY
• The message also displays if the brake system
warning light is on. See Brake System Warning
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message may
display and the StabiliTrak® indicator light on the
instrument panel cluster may be on after first driving the
vehicle and exceeding 20 mph (32 km/h) for 30 seconds.
The StabiliTrak® system is not functional until the
page 4-5 for more information.
• The message could display if the stability system
takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic
checks due to driving conditions.
• The message displays if an engine or vehicle
related problem has been detected and the vehicle
needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
STABILITRAK OFF
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displays
when you turn off StabiliTrak®, or when the stability
control has been automatically disabled. To limit wheel
spin and realize the full benefits of the stability
enhancement system, you should normally leave
StabiliTrak® on. However, you should turn StabiliTrak®
off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or
snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to
free it, or if you are driving in extreme off-road conditions
and require more wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle is
• The message also displays if the vehicle is shifted
into 4LO.
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING DISABLED SERVICE
THROTTLE
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS), this message displays when the
system is re-learning the tire positions on your vehicle.
more information. The tire positions must be re-learned
after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or
information.
This message displays if the starting of the engine is
disabled due to the electronic throttle control system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer
immediately.
This message only appears while the ignition is in
ON/RUN, and will not disappear until the problem is
resolved.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displays
when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned
This message may display along with the check engine
light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle’s
fuel cap is not tightened properly. See Malfunction
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn
this light and message off.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
WAIT TO START
This message displays briefly when the theft-deterrent
system has initially found incorrect conditions within
the vehicle and is making a double check. If your vehicle
does not start soon after, try to start it again. If it still
does not start, have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while the
transmission temperature warning is displayed.
DIC Vehicle Customization
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program certain features to one preferred
setting. Customization features can only be programmed
to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.
This message displays along with a chime if the
transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with
the transmission fluid temperature high can cause
damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool. This message clears
and the chime stops when the fluid temperature reaches
a safe level.
All of the customization options may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
TURN SIGNAL ON
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn
signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn
signal/multifunction lever to the off position.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
To change customization preferences, use the following
procedure.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LANGUAGE
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
PARK (P).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
Press the customization button until the LANGUAGE
screen appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
2. Press the customization button to enter the feature
settings menu.
If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTINGS
AVAILABLE IN PARK will display. Before entering
the menu, make sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to display all
DIC messages in English.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors will
automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of
PARK (P).
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors will automatically lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when
the key is taken out of the ignition.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn
off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also
allows you to select which doors and when the doors
will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
information.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will
not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See
on page 2-4 for more information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the
lock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button
is pressed again within five seconds of the previous
command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DELAY DOOR LOCK
EXIT LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
locking of the vehicle’s doors will be delayed. When
locking the doors with the power door lock switch and a
door is open, this feature will delay locking the doors
until five seconds after the last door is closed. You will
hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use. The key must be out of the ignition for
this feature to work. You can temporarily override
delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch
twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice.
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle’s
doors.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
CHIME VOLUME
This feature allows you to select the volume level of
the chime.
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a
normal level.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
This feature allows you to exit the feature
settings menu.
The current setting will remain.
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
Press the customization button until FEATURE
SETTINGS PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the
DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to exit
the menu.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
FACTORY SETTINGS
If you do not exit, pressing the customization button
again will return you to the beginning of the feature
settings menu.
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
{CAUTION:
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
• The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are
pressed.
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
Audio System(s)
If your vehicle came without a radio, the wiring
provisions for a radio and an antenna were installed at
the assembly plant, so that if you want, a radio can
be installed at the dealer/retailer.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction
while driving.
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While your vehicle is parked:
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not
work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls if the vehicle has them.
Your vehicle may have a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system
can be played even after the ignition is turned off.
more information.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound
equipment can be added, it is very important to do
it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere
with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MP3 Radio with a Single CD Player
Setting the Clock
If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD (MP3)
player, the radio has a H button for setting the time
and date.
AM-FM Radio with Optional CD Player
If your vehicle has an AM/FM radio with an optional
CD player, it has a H (clock) button for setting the time.
With these types of radios, the clock can be set with
either the radio turned on or off.
To set the time and date, follow the instructions:
1. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)
displays.
Set the time by following these steps:
1. Press the H button until the hour begins flashing
2. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if
selected, increases by one.
on the display. Press the H button a second time
and the minutes begin flashing on the display. Press
the H button a third time and the 12HR or 24HR
time format begins flashing.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is to
press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or the \
2. While either the hour or the minutes are flashing,
FWD (forward) button.
turn the f knob, located on the upper right side of
the radio faceplate, clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the time. While the 12HR or
24HR time format is flashing, turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to select the default
time settings.
3. To decrease, press the left © SEEK arrow or the
s REV (reverse) button. You can also turn the f
knob, located on the upper right side of the radio,
to adjust the selected setting.
3. Press the H button again until the clock display
stops flashing to set the currently displayed time;
otherwise, the flashing stops after five seconds and
the current time displayed is automatically set.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Time and Date Default
Settings
MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player, the
radio has a MENU button instead of the H button to
set the time and date.
You can change the time default setting from 12 hours
to 24 hours or change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year.
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
To change the time or date default settings, follow these
instructions:
1. Press the MENU button. Once the H option
displays, press the pushbutton located under
that label. The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
minute, month, day, and year) displays.
1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow that is currently
displayed on the radio screen until the time
12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD
(month and day) and DD/MM (day and month)
are displayed.
2. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
time or date setting labels that you want to change.
Every time the pushbutton is pressed again, the
time or the date if selected, increases by one.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is to
press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or the \
3. Press the H button again to apply the selected
FWD (forward) button.
default, or let the screen time out.
3. To decrease, press the left © SEEK arrow or the
s REV (reverse) button. You can also turn the f
knob, located on the upper right side of the radio,
to adjust the selected setting.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Time and Date Default
Settings
Radio(s)
You can change the time default setting from 12 hours
to 24 hours or change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year.
To change the time or date default settings, follow these
instructions:
1. Press the MENU button. Once the H option
displays, press the pushbutton located under
the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the
radio screen until the 12H (hour) and 24H (hour),
and the date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM
(day and month) displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
AM-FM Radio shown, Radio with CD (Base) similar
3. Press the MENU button again to apply the selected
default, or let the screen time out.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Your Radio may have a Radio Data System (RDS). The
RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon
receiving specific information from these stations and
only works when the information is available. While the
radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station
name or call letters displays. In rare cases, a radio
station could broadcast incorrect information that causes
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
and off.
Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with
Six-Disc CD (MP3) similar
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
Your vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
When the radio is turned on, it plays at the volume level
that was last set. The volume can be adjusted using
this knob.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) automatically
adjusts the radio volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as you speed up or slow down while driving.
That way, the volume level should sound about the
same as you drive.
4 (Information) (AM-FM Radio and Radio with CD
(Base)): Press to switch the display between the radio
station frequency and the time. While the ignition is
off, press to display the time.
4 (Information) (MP3 and RDS Features): Press to
display additional text information related to the current
FM-RDS station or MP3 song. A choice of additional
information such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and
CAT (category) can display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under any one of the labels and the
information about that label displays.
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) label on the radio display.
When information is not available, No Info displays.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at faster
vehicle speeds.
H (Clock) (AM-FM Radio and Radio with CD
(Base)): Your vehicle has a clock button for setting the
time. With this type of radio, the clock can be set
with either the radio turned on or off. See Setting the
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For AM-FM Radio and Radio with CD (Base), scan
presets within the current selected band by pressing and
holding either SEEK arrow for four seconds until a
double beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset,
plays for a few seconds if a strong signal is present,
then goes to the next stored preset. The station
frequency flashes while the radio is in the scan mode.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to switch between FM1 and FM2 and
AM. The selection displays.
f (Tune): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the station frequency.
Setting Preset Stations
© SEEK ¨: Press the arrows to go to the previous
or to the next station and stay there.
If your radio does not have XM™, up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station. For AM-FM Radio and Radio with CD
(Base), the station frequency flashes while the radio is
in the scan mode. Press either arrow again to stop
scanning.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep sounds.
When that pushbutton is pressed and released,
the station that was set, returns.
The radio seeks and scans stations only with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to your
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and
steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
you want stored as a favorite.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites
pages, perform the following steps:
FAV (Favorites): If your vehicle has XM™ and has a
FAV button, a maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency labels and
by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button).
Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages
of favorites, each having six favorite stations available
per page. Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM and FM stations.
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
The balance/fade and tone settings that were previously
adjusted, are stored with the favorite stations.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing the
radio station frequency labels and to begin the
process of programming your favorites for the
chosen amount of numbered pages.
To store a station as a favorite, perform the
following steps:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where
you want the station stored.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds
and the level adjusts to the middle position.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) (AM-FM
Radio and Radio with CD (Base))
BASS/TREB Bass/Treble: To adjust the bass or treble,
press the f knob or the EQ button until the desired
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
tone control label displays. Turn the f knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
setting. The display shows the current bass or treble
level. If a station’s frequency is weak, or if there is static,
decrease the treble.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose bass
and treble equalization settings designed for different
types of music. The choices are pop, rock, country, talk,
jazz, and classical. Selecting MANUAL or changing
bass or treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and
treble settings.
Unique BASS/TREB settings can be saved for each
source.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
(AM-FM Radio and Radio with
CD (Base))
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob until
the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired label. Turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. You can also adjust the highlighted setting
` (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance or fade,
press the ` button or the f knob until the desired
speaker control label displays. Turn the f knob
by pressing either SEEK arrow, \ FWD (forward), or
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the setting.
s REV (reverse) button until the desired levels
are obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak or if there
is static, decrease the treble.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Radio Messages
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and it must
be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
fade, press the f knob until the speaker control labels
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under the
desired label. Turn the f knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting.
Locked or Loc: One of these messages will display
when the THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the
radio. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or
FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds
and the level adjusts to the middle position.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM™
stations while the radio is in the XM™ mode.
LOAD ^: Press to load CDs into the CD player. This
CD player holds up to six CDs.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
United States and Canada only.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the ^ button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
For this vehicle, the XM™ function is not available.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method of recording,
the quality of the music that has been recorded, and
the way the CD-R or CD-RW has been handled. Handle
them carefully. Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their
original cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD or DVD player
scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD does not play properly or not at all. Do not
touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it; this
could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping
the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the
outer edge.
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the ^ button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. If you
want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the
Z button or the DISP knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to
the edge.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
each new track starts to play, the track number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD or DVD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal
computer and a description label is needed, try labeling
the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have
played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track.
If either arrow is held or pressed multiple times,
the player continues moving backward or forward
through the CD.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player
mechanism.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
RDM (Random): Tracks can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order, on one CD or all CDs
in a six-disc CD player.
Z EJECT: Press to eject the CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold for
two seconds to eject all discs.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use random on the Base Radio with Single CD
player, do the following:
RPT (Repeat (Base Radio with CD): With the repeat
setting, one track can be repeated. To repeat the
track you are listening to, press and release the RPT
button. An arrow symbol displays. Press RPT again
to turn off repeat play.
• Press the RDM button to play tracks from a CD in
random order. The random icon displays. Press
again to turn off random play. The random
icon disappears from the display.
4 (Information) (Base Radio with CD): Press to
switch the display between the track number, elapsed
time of the track, and the time. When the ignition is
off, press to display the time.
To use random on an Uplevel Radio with a Single CD
player, do the following:
1. Press the CD/AUX button, insert a disc partway into
the slot of the CD player. A RDM label displays.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
2. To play the tracks in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label
until Random Current Disc displays. Press the
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing the disc and/or track number displays when a
CD is in the player. Press again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Input Device Found” may
display.
To use random on a Radio with a Six-Disc CD player,
do the following:
1. Press the CD/AUX button, press and hold ^. A
beep sounds and Load All Discs displays. Insert
one or more discs partway into the slot of the
CD player.
2. To play tracks from all CDs loaded in random order,
press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM
label until Randomize All Discs displays. Press the
same pushbutton again to turn off random play.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO: This message displays if the EJECT or CD/AUX
buttons are pressed and a CD has not been inserted into
the player.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Your radio with a Single CD player or a Six-Disc
CD player has the capability of playing an MP3 CD-R or
CD-RW disc. For more information on how to play an
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in
the index.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer while reporting the problem.
CD Messages
REMOVE/CHECK DISC: Radios with a Single CD
player or radios with a Six-Disc player displays CHECK
DISC and/or ejects the CD if an error occurs.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an
audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the
front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such
as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer,
etc. can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for
use as another source for audio listening.
ERR (Error): If this message displays and/or the CD
comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See Defensive Driving
on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning the
CD-R or CD-RW.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded
with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,
56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and
320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name,
and album are available for display by the radio
when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of
the portable player. You might need to do additional
volume adjustments from the portable device if the
volume is not loud or soft enough.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing, so you might want to stop it or turn
it off.
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files.
By default the radio shows the MP3 label on the left side
of the screen but plays both file formats in the order
in which they were recorded to the disc.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, the message No Aux Input Device
displays.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MP3 Format
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists could cause the player to be unable
to play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play a large
number of files, folders, playlists or sessions,
minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
name. Long names also take up more space on the
display, potentially getting cut off.
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R
or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• The CD player is able to read and play a maximum
of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders and files.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc could cause the disc
not to function in the player.
Playlists can be changed by using the S c (previous)
and c T (next) folder buttons, the f knob, or the
© SEEK ¨ arrows. You can also play an MP3 CD-R or
CD-RW that was recorded using no file folders. If a CD-R
or CD-RW contains more than the maximum of 50
folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders and files, the player
lets you access and navigate up to the maximum, but all
items over the maximum are not accessible.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension
(other file extensions might not work).
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Root Directory
Order of Play
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory displays as the CD label. All files contained
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio (.CDA)
and MP3 files, a folder under the root directory called
CD accesses all of the CD audio tracks on the disc.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure
that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
No Folder
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder function does not display on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and up buttons search
playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root folder.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or
CD-RW is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R
or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player
and begins playing.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button
for two seconds to eject all discs.
Playing an MP3
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the
CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single
CD Player), or press the load button and wait for
the message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label
side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW
should begin playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3 file, if more than 10 seconds
have played. Press the right arrow to go to the next MP3
file. If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple
times, the player continues moving backward or forward
through MP3 files on the CD.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts
to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
Sc (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
Z EJECT: Press this button to eject CD-R(s) or
CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently
playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to
resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the
file displays.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW
in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located
below the music navigator label. The player scans the
disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag
information. It could take several minutes to scan the
disc depending on the number of MP3 files recorded to
the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio can begin playing
while it is scanning the disc in the background. When
the scan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW begins
playing again.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button
to advance playback quickly within an MP3 file.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of
the file displays.
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3 files in order by artist. The current artist
playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist are
played, the player moves to the next artist in
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3 files on
the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order, on one CD-R/CD-RW or all
discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one
of the following:
alphabetical order on the CD-R/CD-RW and begins
playing MP3 files by that artist. If you want to listen to
MP3 files by another artist, press the pushbutton located
below either arrow button. You will go to the next or
previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing
either button until the desired artist is displayed.
1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R or CD-RW you
are listening to in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until
Random Current Disc displays. Press the same
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By
label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons
below the album button. Press the pushbutton below the
back label to return to the main music navigator
screen. Now the album name is displayed on the second
line between the arrows and songs from the current
album begins to play. Once all songs from that album
are played, the player moves to the next album in
alphabetical order on the CD-R/CD-RW and begins
playing MP3 files from that album.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Non-RDS Radios
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it does
not operate and LOC displays.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback.
RDS Radios
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it does
not operate and LOCKED displays.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The inactive CD remains inside
the radio for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a
message showing disc and/or track number displays
when a CD is in the player. Press this button again and
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary
input device such as a portable audio player. If a
portable audio player is not connected, “No Input Device
Found” displays.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To scan stations, press and hold the down arrow for
two seconds until SCAN displays and a beep sounds.
The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press the down arrow
again to stop scanning.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending on
your vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the
following:
When a CD is playing, press either arrow to go to the
next or previous track.
g (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again, to turn the sound on.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the radio AM, FM, XM™ (if equipped), CD, and auxiliary
input jack.
+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus volume
button to increase or to decrease the volume.
wx (Previous/Next): Press the arrows to go to the
previous or to the next radio station and stay there.
Press the arrows to go to the previous or to the
next radio station stored as a Favorite. The radio only
seeks stations with a strong signal that are in the
selected band.
¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to the next
radio station while in AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped).
Press the seek arrow to go to the next track while
sourced to the CD.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM Stereo
Radio Reception
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals reach
only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or
hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound
to fade in and out.
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power outlet.
Fixed Mast Antenna
AM
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
better radio reception, most AM radio stations boost the
power levels during the day, and then reduce these
levels during the night. Static can also occur when things
like storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on
your radio.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten by
hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who
has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
{CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of
the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. The brakes might not have time to
cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep
pace with the traffic and allow realistic following
distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary
braking. That means better braking and longer
brake life.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on. This
is normal.
If there is a problem with
the ABS, this warning light
will stay on. See Antilock
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the
engine stops, you will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the
power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
Locking Rear Axle
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand
or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the
time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction
and the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle
in front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
StabiliTrak® System
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, it combines anti-lock
brake, traction and stability control systems and
helps the driver maintain directional control of the
vehicle in most driving conditions.
Using ABS
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks
to ensure that it is working properly. You may hear
or feel the system working. This is normal and does
not mean there is a problem with your vehicle. The
system should initialize before the vehicle reaches
20 mph (32 km/h). In some cases, it may take
approximately 2 miles (3.2 km) of driving before the
system initializes.
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might
feel the brakes vibrate or notice some noise, but this
is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time. In
many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pressing and holding the
StabiliTrak® button located
on the instrument panel
for more than five seconds
can turn off StabiliTrak®
and part of the traction
control system.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice
or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to
attempt to free it. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
StabiliTrak® System Operation
The StabiliTrak® system is normally on, except when
the system is initializing or has been disabled with
the StabiliTrak® button. The StabiliTrak® system will
automatically activate to assist the driver in maintaining
vehicle directional control in most driving conditions.
When activated, the StabiliTrak® system may reduce
engine power to the wheels and apply braking to
individual wheels as necessary to assist the driver with
vehicle directional control. If your vehicle is in cruise
control when the system activates, the StabiliTrak®
indicator light on the instrument panel will flash, and the
cruise control will automatically disengage. When the
StabiliTrak® system is no longer active, you may
page 3-11.
page 3-36.
For your safety, the system can only be disabled when
the vehicle speed is less than 20 mph (32 km/h).
You will hear three chimes and the StabiliTrak® not
ready light will come on.
To turn on the StabiliTrak® system, press the StabiliTrak®
button again. StabiliTrak® will automatically turn back on
when the vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h). You
will hear one chime and the StabiliTrak® not ready light
will turn off.
The StabiliTrak® system may also turn off automatically if
it determines that a problem exists with the system. If the
problem does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle,
you should see your dealer/retailer for service.
When the StabiliTrak® system has been turned off you
may still hear system noises as a result of the
brake-traction control coming on.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction Control Operation
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak®
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing
engine power to the wheels (engine speed
management) and by applying brakes to each individual
wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary.
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive, your engine’s driving
power is sent to all four wheels for extra traction
when needed.
This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate
lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle.
It is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for road
conditions.
If the brake-traction control system activates constantly
or if the brakes have heated up due to high speed
braking, the brake-traction control will be automatically
disabled. The system will come back on after the
brakes have cooled. This can take up to two minutes or
longer depending on brake usage.
You may experience a brief vehicle vibration upon
acceleration when driving in slippery conditions. This is
normal and is an indication that the all-wheel drive
system is functioning properly.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens you may
notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise
or vibration. This is normal.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around the
problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
page 4-3. It is better to remove as much speed as you
can from a possible collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right depending on the space
available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are
driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
we suggest the following tips:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance is longer and
vehicle control more limited.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You might not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Watch for animals.
Driving at Night
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But,
as we get older, these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because your headlamps can only
light up so much road ahead.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
{CAUTION:
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
• Allow extra following distance.
• Pass with caution.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
on page 5-56.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
Other driving tips include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
clean — inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle
instruments often.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hill and Mountain Roads
{CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
{CAUTION:
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be
driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it can offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to be
very careful.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe and/or the fuel
operated heater exhaust system, if equipped.
And check around again from time to time to
be sure snow does not collect there. If your
vehicle has a diesel engine and a fuel operated
heater, see “Fuel Operated Heater (FOH)” in
the diesel engine supplement.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery (or batteries) charged. You will
need a well-charged battery (or batteries) to restart the
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with the
headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too severe
for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the rocking method.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to
clear the area around the front wheels. Turn off
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the
wheels as little as possible. To prevent transmission
wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift,
and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when
the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning the
wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will
cause a rocking motion that could free your vehicle.
If that does not get your vehicle out after a few tries, it
might need to be towed out. If your vehicle does
page 4-25.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire
and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
page 5-64.
Tire and Loading Information Label
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s
placard.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With
the driver’s door open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock post (striker). The
tire and loading information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Example 1
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle. See Towing
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
information on towing a trailer, towing safety
rules and trailering tips.
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
1000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (136 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers, and
cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity
weight.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find
out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and
weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Certification/Tire Label
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out.
{CAUTION:
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found
on the rear edge of the driver’s door. The
label shows the size of your vehicle’s original tires
and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Add-On Equipment
{CAUTION:
When you carry removable items, you may need
to put a limit on how many people you carry
inside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle
before you buy and install the new equipment.
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment? See
your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy” (towing your vehicle with
all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly” (towing
your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two
wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed.
Dinghy Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following.
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to attach
and secure the vehicle being towed to the dolly and
then the loaded dolly to the tow vehicle. Make sure
the wheels are straight before towing.
All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. To properly tow these
vehicles, they should be placed on a platform trailer with
all four wheels off the ground.
Use an adequate clamping device to ensure that
the front wheels are locked into the straight position.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the tow vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for
six weeks or more, remove the battery cable
from the negative terminal (post) of the battery to
prevent your battery from draining while towing.
Dolly Towing
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)
All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with two
wheels on the ground. To properly tow these vehicles,
they should be placed on a platform trailer with all
four wheels off the ground.
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle from
the rear:
1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.
page 2-28 for more information.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
3. Put the automatic transmission in PARK (P).
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the instructions in this section and check with your
dealer/retailer for more information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
Towing a Trailer
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see the DURAMAX®
Diesel manual for more information.
{CAUTION:
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section.
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and
information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration, braking,
handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
• And the weight on your vehicle’s tires
about the Tow/Haul button, and the Tow/Haul
indicator light.
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
Weight of the Trailer
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• See also “Driving on Grades” later in this section.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following charts show how much your trailer can weigh, based upon vehicle model and options.
G1500 Cargo Van 2WD Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
4,400 lbs (1 996 kg)
GCWR*
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
4300 V6
5300 V8
3.73
3.73
6,700 lbs (3 039 kg)
H1500 Cargo Van AWD Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
5300 V8
3.73
6,500 lbs (2 948 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
G1500 Passenger
Van 2WD
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
5300 V8
3.73
6,300 lbs (2 858 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
H1500 Passenger
Van AWD
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
5300 V8
3.73
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
G2500 Cargo Van 2WD
Short Wheelbase
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
6,400 lbs (2 903 kg)
7,400 lbs (3 357 kg)
8,400 lbs (3 810 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4800 V8
6000 V8
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G2500 Cargo Van 2WD
Long Wheelbase
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
6,100 lbs (2 767 kg)
7,100 lbs (3 220 kg)
8,200 lbs (3 719 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4800 V8
6000 V8
G2500 Passenger Van
2WD Short Wheelbase
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
6000 V8
3.73
7,700 lbs (3 493 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
G3500 Cargo Van 2WD
Short Wheelbase
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
6,300 lbs (2 858 kg)
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg)
8,400 lbs (3 810 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 k3)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4800 V8
6000 V8
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G3500 Cargo Van 2WD
Long Wheelbase
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
3.73
4.10
3.73
4.10
6,100 lbs (2 767 kg)
7,100 lbs (3 221 kg)
8,200 lbs (3 719 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4800 V8
6000 V8
G3500 Passenger Van
2WD Short Wheelbase
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
6000 V8
3.73
7,600 lbs (3 447 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
G3500 Passenger Van
2WD Long Wheelbase
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
6000 V8
3.73
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
*The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) is the
total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo equipment
and conversion. The GCWR for your vehicle should not
be exceeded.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance
for more information.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And
if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load
to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to a
maximum of 400 lbs (181 kg) with a weight carrying
hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up
to a maximum of 1,000 lbs (454 kg) with a weight
distributing hitch.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle.
This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight
on the rear axle.
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights
are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get
them right simply by moving some items around in
the trailer.
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the
vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce
your trailering capacity more than the total of the
additional weight.
You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent
of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the
weight is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on
the rear axle will be greater than just the weight
itself, as much as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the
rear axle could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs
(578 kg). Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the
total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to, but
within the limit for RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to
trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with some
of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger
and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and
gear in the vehicle as well. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg)
to the front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear
axle weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual
weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you
with being able to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue
weight. Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent
of total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that the
largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not
exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way
to be sure you are not exceeding any of these ratings is to
weigh your vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
If you use a weight distributing hitch, make sure you
don’t go over the rear axle limit before you apply
the weight distribution spring bars.
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you may
think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds
(318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would only be
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think you
must limit tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to
avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must still consider the
effect on the rear axle. Because your rear axle now
weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs
(408 kg) on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
(A) Body to Ground Distance, (B) Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so that the distance (A) remains the
same both before and after coupling the trailer to the
tow vehicle.
If you use a step-bumper hitch, your bumper could be
damaged in sharp turns. Make sure you have ample
room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer
and the bumper.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh
more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg), be sure to use a
properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
when you’re driving. You should always use a sway
control if your trailer will weigh more than these limits.
You can ask a hitch dealer/retailer about sway controls.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer
manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your rig. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you’re using the wiring provided with the
factory-installed trailering package, you should not need
to make any holes in the body of your vehicle.
However, if you have an aftermarket hitch installed, you
may need to make holes in the body.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,
adjust and maintain them properly.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, your trailer brake
system cannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake
system.
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you
remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into
your vehicle as well as dirt and water. See “Carbon
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Driving with a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle.
You can not see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness or death. See Engine
when towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
the climate control setting for maximum air
because it only recirculates the air inside
your vehicle. See Climate Control System
in the Index.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra
wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal (included in the
optional trailering package).
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving On Grades
Parking on Hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or a lower gear under heavy
loads and/or hilly conditions.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get
page 5-27.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet. Then turn your wheels into the curb if
facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections
before you start your trip.
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Red/Black Stripe: Battery Feed (30A Fuse)
Trailer Wiring Harness
• Brown: Trailer Park Lamp Supply Voltage
(15A fuse)**
The optional heavy-duty trailer wiring package includes
a wiring harness, with a seven-pin connector at the
rear of the vehicle and a four-wire harness assembly
under the driver side of the instrument panel. The
four-wire harness assembly comes without a connector.
• Yellow: Left Rear Stop and Turn Signal *
The four-wire harness (without connector) contains the
following circuits:
If your vehicle does not have a trailer hitch, the
seven-wire harness assembly with connector is taped
together and located in a frame pocket at the driver side
rear left corner of the frame.
• Black: Ground
• Red/White: Battery Feed
• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal
• Light Blue: CHMSL/Stoplamp Supply Voltage
If your vehicle has a trailer hitch, the seven-wire
harness assembly with connector is attached to a
bracket on the hitch platform. In both cases, the
seven-wire harness has a connector and includes a
30-amp feed wire.
* If your vehicle is a cutaway with trailer provisions, a
15 amp fuse will be shared for both left/stop trailer turn
and right/stop trailer turn signals. However, the
cutaway lighting connector will have a 10 amp fuse for
each signal.
The seven-wire harness connector contains the following
trailer circuits:
** If your vehicle is a cutaway with trailer provisions, a
15 amp fuse will be shared for trailer park lamps
and cutaway rear lighting connector park lamps. Also, a
10 amp fuse will be shared for trailer back-up lamps
and cutaway rear lighting connector back-up lamps.
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps (10A fuse)**
• White: Ground
• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal
• Dark Green: Right Rear Stop and Turn Signal*
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your
GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
should use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
Fuel
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Diesel Fuel
Requirements and Fuel System” in the DURAMAX®
Diesel manual.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
For vehicles with gasoline engines, please read this.
Gasoline
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind
noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield
washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 4),
you can use either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol
fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85); also see
gasoline engines, use only regular unleaded gasoline.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Octane
California Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance might be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might fail
a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-38. If this occurs, return to your authorized
dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
might not be covered by your warranty.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or
3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your dealer/retailer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the
emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification
D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel labeled E85
will have an ethanol content between 70% and 85%.
Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet
ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could
cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel
must be formulated properly for your climate according
to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble
starting on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel is not
properly formulated for your climate. If this happens,
switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank
can improve starting. For good starting and heater
efficiency below 32°F (0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel tank
should contain no more than 70% ethanol. It is best
not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85.
If you do switch fuels, it is recommended that you
add as much fuel as possible — do not add less than
three gallons (11 L) when refueling. You should drive
the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
seven miles (11 km) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the
change in ethanol concentration.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 4 only),
you can use either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol
page 5-5. In all other engines, use only the unleaded
Only vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 4)
can use 85% ethanol fuel (E85). We encourage the use
of E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it. The ethanol
in E85 is a “renewable” fuel, meaning it is made from
renewable sources such as corn and other crops.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol
fuel (E85) pump available. The U. S. Department
of Energy has an alternative fuels website
(www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html)
that can help you find E85 fuel. Those stations that
do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol
content. Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content
is greater than 85%.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you
will need to refill the fuel tank more often when
using E85 than when you are using gasoline. See Filling
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with
E85 fuel and can harm your vehicle’s fuel system.
Do not add anything to E85. Damage caused by
additives would not be covered by your new vehicle
warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tethered fuel cap is
located behind a hinged
fuel door on the driver side
of the vehicle.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability, a yellow cap with
the words “E85/gasoline” can be seen.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-38.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You
can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
Things that burn can get on hot engine or fuel
operated heater (FOH) parts and start a fire.
These include liquids like fuel, oil, coolant,
brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine or fuel
operated heater (FOH).
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located in front of
the driver’s side door
frame near the floor.
3. Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its
retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in
the hood.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up the
secondary hood release, which is located
underneath the middle of the hood.
If your vehicle has an underhood lamp, it will
automatically come on and stay on until the hood is
closed.
Before closing the hood, be sure all of the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on
the hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the
slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer. Let
the hood down and close it firmly.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
on page 5-27.
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Engine Oil” in
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual.
page 5-29.
Checking Engine Oil
D. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” under
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-36.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the location of the
When to Add Engine Oil
engine oil fill cap.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for this information on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst
symbol on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
Look for three things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting
GM Standard GM6094M. Look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier
cold starting and better protection for the engine at
extremely low temperatures.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
page 3-52. Change the oil as soon as possible within the
next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you
are driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained
service people who will perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system. It is also important to
check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you need for good performance and
engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change
the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change the oil prior
to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message being
turned on, reset the system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of used oil, ask your
dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recycling
center for help.
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message:
1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal
slowly three times within five seconds.
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the message comes back on when you start your
vehicle, the engine oil life system has not reset. Repeat
the procedure. If it still does not reset, see your
dealer/retailer for service.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a
new filter is required. Never use compressed air to
clean the filter.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
The engine air cleaner/filter is located near the center of
the engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
1. Unhook the retainer clips and remove the cover.
2. Lift the filter out of the engine air cleaner/filter
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as
little dirt as possible.
3. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter housing.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. Make
sure that the filter fits properly into the housing.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine,
see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more
information.
5. Reinstall the cover and fasten the retaining clips.
{CAUTION:
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
page 6-6, and be sure to use the transmission fluid
page 6-13.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive
the vehicle in DRIVE (D) until the engine temperature
gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle
has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine
off, but this is used only as a reference. Let the
engine run at idle for five minutes if outside
temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder
than 50°F (10°C), you may have to idle the engine
longer. Should the fluid level be low during this cold
check, you must check the fluid hot before adding fluid.
Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accurate
reading of the fluid level.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
more information on location.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transmission dipstick
is located near the center
of the engine compartment
and will be labeled with
the graphic shown.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area for
a cold check or in the HOT or cross-hatched
area for a hot check. Be sure to keep the dipstick
pointed down to get an accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Engine Coolant
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission dipstick
tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it
is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If
the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a
hot check. It does not take much fluid, generally less
than one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
page 5-27.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, radiator
and fuel operated heater (FOH) corrosion. In
addition, the engine coolant may require changing
sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
CAUTION: (Continued)
With plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would not get
the overheat warning. Your engine could catch
fire and you or others could be burned. Use a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and the
proper coolant.
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by your warranty.
Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core, and other parts.
{CAUTION:
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer/retailer check your cooling system.
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
Checking Coolant for Gasoline Engines
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be
careful not to spill it.
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Checking
Coolant” under “Van Models” in the DURAMAX® Diesel
Supplement for information on checking your vehicle’s
coolant.
The coolant recovery tank
is located near the center
of the engine
compartment. See Engine
on page 5-14 for more
information on location.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to add coolant at the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the COLD
FILL mark, or a little higher.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radiator Pressure Cap
{CAUTION:
The radiator pressure cap is located near the
center of the engine compartment. See Engine
information on location.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol, and it will burn if the engine parts are
hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot
engine.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For
information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
Engine Overheating
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage
on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
{CAUTION:
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” under
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
If the warning continues, and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast
as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you are parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the
engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Cooling System
A. Radiator Pressure Cap
B. Coolant Recovery Tank
C. Engine Cooling Fan(s)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Van Models”
under “Cooling System” in the DURAMAX® Diesel
Supplement.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or above the COLD FILL mark. If it is not, you may
have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere
else in the cooling system.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Heater, fuel operated heater (FOH), radiator
hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot.
Do not touch them. If you do, you can be
burned.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank for Gasoline Engines
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “How to
Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank” under “Van
Models” in the Cooling System section of the
DURAMAX® Diesel Supplement for the proper coolant
fill procedure.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant
level is not at the COLD FILL mark, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® engine
coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
See if the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it does not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. The
engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
components in the engine compartment.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will
burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not
spill coolant on a hot engine or components in
the engine compartment.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
COLD FILL mark, start your vehicle.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until
it first stops. Do not press down while turning the
pressure cap.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator for
Gasoline Engines
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “How to Add
Coolant to the Radiator” under “Van Models” in the
Cooling System section of the DURAMAX® Diesel
Supplement for the proper radiator fill procedure.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
information about the proper coolant mixture.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD
FILL mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is
not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and
reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer
towing, and/or high outside temperatures, the fan
speed increases as the clutch more fully engages, so
you may hear an increase in fan noise. This is
normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission
slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling
system functioning properly. The fan will slow down
when additional cooling is not required and the clutch
partially disengages.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially
disengages.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
The power steering fluid
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
reservoir is located in the
engine compartment
on the driver’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine
page 5-14 for reservoir
location.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid
level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the COLD FILL mark. If necessary,
add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
To prevent contamination of brake fluid, never check or
fill the power steering reservoir with the brake master
cylinder cover off.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-14 for reservoir
location.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove
brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
the location of the
{CAUTION:
reservoir.
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine and/or fuel operated heater parts, if
equipped. If your vehicle has a diesel engine
and a fuel operated heater, see “Fuel Operated
Heater (FOH)” in the diesel engine supplement.
The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough.
You or others could be burned, and your
vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid
only when work is done on the brake hydraulic
system. See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this
section.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake hydraulic system.
If it is, you should have the brake hydraulic system fixed,
since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes
will not work well.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
Checking Brake Fluid
The brake fluid can be checked without taking off the
cap by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
The fluid level should be
above MIN. If it is not,
have the brake hydraulic
system checked to
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
hydraulic system, the brakes might not work
well. This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.
see if there is a leak.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
What to Add
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are
pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
Every time you make a brake stop, the disc brakes
adjust for wear.
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Vehicle Storage
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
page 5-41 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery
or use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain
the charge of the battery over an extended period
of time.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. See Engine Compartment
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations of the other vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump
starting terminal and a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal. You should always use these
remote terminals instead of the terminals on the
battery.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
The remote positive (+) terminal is located behind a
red plastic cover near the engine accessory drive
bracket on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment, below the alternator. To uncover the
remote positive (+) terminal, open the red plastic
cover.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
The remote negative (−) terminal is located on the
engine drive bracket on all V8 engines and is
marked GND (Ground).
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
On V6 engines the remote negative (−) terminal is
located on a tab attached to the engine accessory
drive bracket and is marked GND (Ground).
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle
with the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) terminal for this purpose. It is
marked GND.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its
original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. However, there are two additional systems that
need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have the 1500 Series, the proper level is
from 5/8 inch (15 mm) to 1 5/8 inch (40 mm) below
the bottom of the filler plug hole. The proper level for
the 2500 and 3500 Series is from 0 to 1/4 (6 mm) below
the bottom of the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to reach the proper level.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
What to Use
How to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 3/8 inch (10 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
What to Use
How to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the
bottom of the filler plug
hole, you may need to add
some lubricant.
Noise Control System
Tampering with Noise Control
System Prohibited
The following information relates to compliance with
federal noise emission standards for vehicles with
a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg). The Maintenance Schedule
provides information on maintaining the noise control
system to minimize degradation of the noise emission
control system during the life of your vehicle. The noise
control system warranty is given in your warranty
booklet.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
Engine:
• Removal or rendering engine speed governor, if the
vehicle has one, inoperative so as to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer specifications.
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing
thereof:
1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any
person, other than for purposes of maintenance,
repair or replacement, of any device or element of
design incorporated into any new vehicle for
the purpose of noise control, prior to its sale or
delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
use; or
Fan and Drive:
• Removal of fan clutch, if the vehicle has one, or
rendering clutch inoperative.
• Removal of the fan shroud, if the vehicle has one.
Air Intake:
2. The use of the vehicle after such device or element
of design has been removed or rendered inoperative
by any person.
• Removal of the air cleaner silencer.
• Modification of the air cleaner.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are
the acts listed below.
Exhaust:
• Removal of the muffler and/or resonator.
Insulation:
• Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaust pipe
clamps.
• Removal of the noise shields or any underhood
insulation.
Fuel Operated Heater (FOH) — Diesel
Engine:
• Removal of the muffler.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps
Bulb Replacement
To remove the headlamp assembly from the vehicle and
access the bulbs:
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
for more information.
2. Remove the two bolts from the headlamp assembly.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
3. Remove the two pins on the top of the headlamp
assembly. To remove the pins, turn the outer pin
clockwise and pull it straight up. To remove
the inner pin, turn it counterclockwise and pull it
straight up.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Lift the inboard side of the headlamp to release the
inboard tab from the radiator support.
5. Lift the outboard side of the headlamp to release
the outboard tab from the radiator support.
6. Lower the headlamp to allow the vertical adjustor to
clear the tie bar.
7. Turn the headlamp forward and upward to remove
it from the grille.
8. Turn the bulb connector counterclockwise and pull it
out of the housing.
9. Without removing the headlamp assembly itself,
remove the bulb socket from the back of the
headlamp on the driver’s side.
10. Turn the bulb counterclockwise one quarter turn to
remove it from the socket.
12. Install the new bulb into the socket then reinstall it
into the headlamp assembly.
11. On the passenger’s side, turn the bulb clockwise
one turn.
13. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlamp
assembly.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the lamp from the grille.
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps
4. Squeeze the tab on the side of the bulb socket
while turning it counterclockwise.
To replace the front turn signal, sidemarker and/or
parking lamp bulb(s):
5. Remove the bulb socket from the back of the lamp
assembly.
6. Replace the bulb.
7. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall it in the
lamp assembly.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
The Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) is
located above the rear doors at the center of
the vehicle.
1. Use a small tool to unlatch the outboard clip on
the lamp.
2. Pull the lamp forward to completely unlatch the clip.
Move the lamp to the outboard side to loosen
the tabs.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace a bulb:
Taillamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Remove the
two inboard nuts
from the inside of the
taillamp assembly.
1. Remove the two screws from the CHMSL assembly.
2. Remove the assembly.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise one quarter turn to
remove it from the socket.
2. Pull the taillamp assembly rearward to clear
the studs.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reverse the steps to reinstall the assembly.
3. Slide the taillamp assembly slightly upward to
release the lower clip.
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, as in a
luggage carrier, care should be taken not to block
or damage the CHMSL.
4. Remove the three nuts on the taillamp assembly.
5. Remove the taillamp assembly from the vehicle.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Back-up, Rear Parking,
Stoplamp, and Turn Signal Lamp
3157
Center High Mounted Stop
Lamp (CHMSL)
912
Front Parking and Turn
Signal Lamp
Front Sidemarker Lamp
Headlamps
3157KX
194
Composite High-Beam
Headlamp
9005
Composite Low-Beam
Headlamp
Sealed Beam Headlamp
9006GS
H6054
6. Remove the bulb socket by squeezing the tab on
the side of the socket while turning it
counterclockwise.
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
7. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it.
8. Install a new bulb.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
9. Reverse the steps to reinstall the taillamp assembly.
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. To remove the type with a
release clip, do the following:
3. The insert has two notches at one end that are
locked by bottom claws of the blade assembly.
At the notched end, pull the insert from the blade
assembly.
1. Lift the wiper arm until it locks into a vertical position.
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the notched
end last, into the end with two blade claws. Then
slide the insert all the way through the blade claws
at the opposite end.
5. Make sure that the notches are locked by the
bottom claws. Make sure that all other claws
are properly locked on both sides of the insert slot.
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
ook. Pull it up until the pivot locking tab locks in
the hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
into the windshield.
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release it
from the wiper arm hook.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if
your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples
of a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. For more
page 5-76.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load
Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and
the maximum pressure needed to support
that load. For information on recommended
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The
letters and numbers following DOT code are
the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may have the date of
manufacture.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum
pressure needed to support that load when used
in a dual configuration. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire
on page 4-20.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum
pressure needed to support that load when used
as a single. For information on recommended
tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
page 4-20.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter
P as the first character in the tire size means
a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of
a tire size.
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system. The
letters LT as the first two characters in the tire
size means a light truck tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim
Association.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric) tire
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
75 percent as high as it is wide.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a
tire. The load index can range from 1 to 279.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-64.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
page 4-20.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-20.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
page 5-73.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
Check your tires once a month or more.
Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare
information.
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
Dual Tire Operation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt
or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheel nut torque after
100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km)
of driving. For proper wheel nut tightening information,
see “Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire”
page 5-82. Also see “Wheel Nut Torque” under
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally wears
faster than the inner tire. Your tires will wear more
evenly and last longer if you rotate the tires periodically.
{CAUTION:
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.
If you operate your vehicle with a tire that is
badly underinflated, the tire can overheat. An
overheated tire can lose air suddenly or catch
fire. You or others could be injured. Be sure all
tires (including the spare) are properly inflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
page 5-64 for more information on proper tire inflation.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
for additional information.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), if your
vehicle has this feature, is designed to warn the driver
when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors
are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly,
excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires
and transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS will illuminate the
low tire pressure warning
symbol located on the
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210 of
Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
instrument panel cluster.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At the same time a message to check the pressure
in a specific tire appears on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light
and the DIC warning message come on at each
ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct
inflation pressure. If your vehicle has DIC buttons,
tire pressure levels can be viewed by the driver.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For additional information and details about the DIC
operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays
page 3-52.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for
the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning light
and DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the
conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC
message to come on are:
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your
vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading Your
Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle.
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once
the TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”
later in this section.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or
more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
page 5-74.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, to
match the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutes
to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you need to start over.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to 30 seconds to sound,
confirms that the sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and wheel position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the
DIC screen.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
If your vehicle does not have RKE, press the Driver
Information Center (DIC) vehicle information
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and that
the TPMS sensor matching process is no longer
active. The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on
the DIC display screen goes off.
button until the PRESS V TO RELEARN TIRE
POSITIONS message displays. The horn sounds
twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode
and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on
the DIC screen.
If your vehicle does not have RKE or DIC buttons,
press the trip odometer reset stem located on
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
the instrument panel cluster until the PRESS V TO
RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS message displays.
The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver
is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
message displays on the DIC screen.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
Single Rear Wheels
If your vehicle has single rear wheels, always use
the correct rotation patterns shown here when
rotating your vehicle’s tires. Do not include
the spare tire in the tire rotation, if the spare
tire/wheel assembly does not match your vehicle’s
road tires and wheels in size and type.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, also see Dual
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
Dual Rear Wheels
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, always use
one of the correct rotation patterns shown
here when rotating the tires.
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS), reset the TPMS sensors after
rotating the tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
When you install dual wheels, be sure that vent
holes in the inner and outer wheels on each
side are lined up.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the
front and rear inflation pressures as shown
on the Tire and Loading Information label. See
wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut
page 5-116.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push,
pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it
moves, tighten the cable. See Storing a Flat or
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which appear
when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
Some commercial
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
truck tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four (or six if
your vehicle has dual rear wheels). This is because
uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep your
vehicle performing most like it did when the tires were
new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect the
braking and handling performance of your vehicle.
for information on proper tire rotation.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
{CAUTION:
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC spec number will be followed by a MS, for mud
for additional information.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires) the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on your
vehicle’s wheels.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
{CAUTION:
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover
airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control,
the performance of these systems can be affected.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use
GM specific wheel and tire systems developed
for your vehicle, and have them properly
installed by a GM certified technician.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.
Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure
warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning
level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading
the Tire and Loading Information label and its location
on your vehicle.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
Wheel Replacement
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment might need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
for proper diagnosis.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new
GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure
to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced on
a dual wheel setup, check the wheel nut torque after
100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km)
of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque”
information.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your vehicle does not have dual wheels
and has a tire size other than P245/75R16 or
Tire Chains
LT245/75R16, use tire chains only where legal and
only when you must. Use chains that are the proper
size for your tires. Install them on the tires of the
rear axle. Do not use chains on the tires of the front
axle. Tighten them as tightly as possible with the
ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the
chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can
hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and
retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down
until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the
wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has dual wheels or P245/75R16
or LT245/75R16 size tires, do not use tire
chains. They can damage your vehicle because
there is not enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the proper amount
of clearance can cause damage to the brakes,
suspension, or other vehicle parts. The area
damaged by the tire chains could cause you to
lose control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust, or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin the vehicle’s wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
{CAUTION:
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
If you have a cargo van or a passenger van, the
equipment you will need is located in the passenger
side rear corner of the vehicle.
Remove the retaining wing
bolt and lift it off of the
mounting bracket.
The following information tells you how to use the jack
and change a tire.
If you have a van with the 15-passenger seating
arrangement, the equipment you will need is secured on
the rear floor of the passenger side of the vehicle.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To access the equipment, remove the retaining wing
bolt and lift it out of the mounting bracket.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A), jack
handle extension (B), jack handle (C), wheel wrench (D),
and the ratchet (E).
The spare tire is stored underneath the rear of your
vehicle. You will use the wheel wrench (D) and
the ratchet (E) to lower the spare tire from the vehicle.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To lower the spare tire from the vehicle:
1. Attach the wheel
wrench and ratchet,
with the DOWN
side facing you. The
wheel wrench has
a socket end and a flat
chisel end. Note that
there is an UP side and
a DOWN side on the
ratchet.
2. Put the flat chisel end of the wheel wrench on an
angle through the hole between the body and the
bumper. Be sure the flat end connects into the
hoist shaft.
3. Turn the ratchet counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire to the ground. If the spare tire does
not lower to the ground, the secondary latch
is engaged causing the tire not to lower. See
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
If your vehicle has plastic wheel nut caps, loosen them
by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. The
wheel nut caps are designed to remain with the center
cap. Remove the center cap.
If the wheel has a smooth center piece, place the chisel
end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and
gently pry it out.
2. With the DOWN side facing you, use the ratchet
and wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
4. When the tire has been lowered, pull the tire toward
you so you can reach the tire retainer and pull it up
through the wheel opening.
If you have a vehicle which was completed from a cab
and chassis, refer to the information from the body
supplier/installer.
The spare tire is a full-size tire, like the other tires on
your vehicle.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Assemble the jack and tools:
Rear Position
Front Position
Rear Flat: Assemble the jack (A) together with the
jack handle (B), jack handle extension (C) and
ratchet (D) as shown. Be sure that the ratchet has
the UP mark facing you. To assemble the jack
handle and jack handle extension, use the art and
text following.
Front Flat: Assemble the jack (A) together with the
jack handle (B) and ratchet (C) as shown. Be
sure that the ratchet has the UP mark facing you.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connect the jack handle (B) and jack handle
extension (C) together and press the retention
clip (arrow) so it engages.
Front Position
4. Position the jack under
the vehicle as shown.
Rear Position
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the ratchet clockwise.
Make sure the UP mark faces you. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough
room for the spare tire to fit.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Remove all the
wheel nuts.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
page 5-82.
7. Take flat tire off of the mounting surface.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
9. Put the wheel nuts
back on with the
rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel.
Tighten each wheel
nut by hand until
and spare wheel.
the wheel is held
against the hub.
{CAUTION:
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
{CAUTION:
Wheel nuts that are not tight can work loose. If
all the nuts on a wheel come off, the wheel can
come off the vehicle, causing a crash. All
wheel nuts must be properly tightened. Follow
the rules in this section to be sure they are.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If wheel studs are damaged, they can break. If
all the studs on a wheel broke, the wheel could
come off and cause a crash. If any stud is
damaged because of a loose-running wheel, it
could be that all of the studs are damaged. To
be sure, replace all studs on the wheel. If the
stud holes in a wheel have become larger, the
wheel could collapse in operation. Replace any
wheel if its stud holes have become larger or
distorted in any way. Inspect hubs and
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts
can cause the wheel to come loose and even
come off. This could lead to a crash. If you
have to replace them, be sure to get new
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
torque specification.
hub-piloted wheels for damage. Because of
loose running wheels, piloting pad damage may
occur and require replacement of the entire hub,
for proper centering of the wheels. When
replacing studs, hubs, wheel nuts or wheels, be
sure to use GM original equipment parts.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off the vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is
damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire must
be stowed with the valve stem pointing down.
for instructions on storing the spare tire correctly.
11. Use the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts firmly.
Turn the wheel wrench clockwise and in a
crisscross sequence as shown.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed next.
12. Put the wheel cover or the center cap and plastic
wheel nut caps back on. Remove any wheel blocks.
Have a technician check the wheel nut tightness of
all wheels with a torque wrench after the first
100 miles (160 km) and then 1,000 miles (1600 km)
after that. Repeat this service whenever you have
a tire removed or serviced. See Capacities and
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:
2. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you or
on either side of you as you pull the jack out
from the under spare.
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable end is
visible.
3. Connect the jack handle (A) and jack handle
extension (B) together and press the retention
clip (arrow) so it engages.
If the cable is not visible,
start this procedure at
Step 6.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Attach the jack handle/jack handle extension to the
jack. With the UP mark facing you, slide the ratchet
onto the end of the jack handle extension.
5. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear
bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack
under the center of the spare tire and turn the
handle clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the
secondary latch spring.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place. This
lets you know that the secondary latch has
released. The spare tire is now balancing on
the jack.
9. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it
through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or
secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,
you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstall
this cable before driving your vehicle.
7. Lower the jack by turning the ratchet
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
10. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turn the
wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the bumper
clockwise to raise the cable back up.
8. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to
push against the spare while firmly pulling the
jack out from under the spare tire with the
other hand.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you
can. You will not be able to store a spare or flat
tire using the hoist assembly until it has been repaired
or replaced.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, slide the
ratchet onto the wheel wrench and insert the
wheel wrench into the hoist shaft hole above the
bumper. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to
lower the spare the rest of the way. Be sure the
DOWN mark on the ratchet is facing you.
To continue changing the flat tire, return to Step 4 of
page 5-86.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed down.
2. Pull the retaining bar through the center of the
wheel, making sure it is properly attached.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pull the wheel toward the rear of the vehicle,
keeping the cable tight.
4. With the UP side facing you, attach the ratchet to
the wheel wrench.
5. Put the flat end of the wheel wrench on an angle
through the hole in the rear door frame, above the
bumper.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the ratchet until the tire
is secure and the cable is tight. The spare tire hoist
cannot be overtightened.
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the ratchet to tighten the cable.
You will hear two clicks when the tire is up all
the way.
8. Return the jacking equipment to the proper location.
Secure the items and replace the jack cover.
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spare Tire
Appearance Care
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire
Interior Cleaning
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust
and dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt
can damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove
particles from your upholstery. It is important to
keep your upholstery from becoming and remaining
heavily soiled. Soils should be removed as quickly
as possible. Your vehicle’s interior may experience
extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. The spare tire is made to perform well
at speeds up to 70 mph (112 km/h) at the recommended
inflation pressure, so you can finish your trip.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced
as soon as you can and installed back onto your
vehicle. This way, a spare tire will be available in case
you need it again. Do not mix tires and wheels of
different sizes, because they will not fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
{CAUTION:
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on your
vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states
that it should not be used on plastic parts, do not
use it on your vehicle or damage may occur
and it would not be covered by the warranty.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that
are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on
your vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Follow all manufacturers’ directions regarding correct
product usage, necessary safety precautions and
appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-102.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
• Heat and sun
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Sheet Metal Damage
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects tires. No wiping
necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
Swirl Remover Polish
Description
Polishing Cloth
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls
and raised white lettering.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Wash Wax Concentrate
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Spot Lifter
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Chrome Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Odor Eliminator
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See Capacities
engine code.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the front passenger door frame. It is very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. The label has
the following information:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. You can see it if you look through
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Certification/Tire and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
5-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Electrical System
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload,
overload due to heavy snow, etc., may cause wiper
linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from
the windshield before using the windshield wipers. If
the overload is caused by some electrical problem and
not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as they
should.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even
if your vehicle is not operating.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the engine
compartment fuse block. An electrical overload will
cause the lamps to flicker on and off, or in some cases
to remain off. If this happens, have your headlamp
wiring checked right away.
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuse
Usage
Fuse
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Usage
Ignition Switch, Theft Deterrent
System Module (PK3)
Upfitter Courtesy Lamps
Climate Control 1 (HVAC)
Empty
Instrument Panel Cluster
Audio System, Chime
Auxiliary Park Lamp
Rear Defogger
3
Outside Rearview Mirror Heater
Empty
4
5
6
7
8
Empty
Cargo Door Unlock
Rear Door Lock
Front Door Lock
Rear Passenger Door Unlock
Upfitter Park Lamps
Front Passenger Door Unlock
Driver Door Unlock
Airbag System, Automatic Occupant
Sensing (AOS) System
Right Rear Park Lamp
Left Rear Park Lamp
Upfitter Auxiliary 2 (J-Case)
Upfitter Auxiliary 1 (J-Case)
Rear Blower (J-Case)
Empty (J-Case)
9
10
Auxiliary Trailer Back-up Lamps
Remote Function Actuator, Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Climate Control (HVAC) Controls
Trailer Park Lamps
Front Park Lamps
Taillamps, Back-up Lamps
Empty
Steering Wheel Sensor
Outside Rearview Mirror Switch
Empty
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Empty
5-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Relays
39
40
Usage
Run (High Current Micro)
Park Lamps (High Current Micro)
Empty (Mini Micro)
Upfitter Auxiliary 2 (High Current
ISO Relay)
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
(High Current Micro)
Rear Defogger (High Current Micro)
The fuse block is located in the engine compartment on
the driver side of the vehicle.
41
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
42
43
44
Circuit Breaker
Usage
Power Window
Power Seats
45
46
5-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuse
Usage
Left High-Beam Headlamp
Fuel Pump
Empty
Fuel Heater (Diesel)
Fuse
Usage
Right High-Beam Headlamp
Empty
Left Low-Beam Headlamp
Right Stoplamp, Trailer Turn Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuse
9
10
Usage
Fuse
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Usage
Right Low-Beam Headlamp
Daytime Running Lamps 2 (DRL)
Fuel System Control Module
Ignition (Gas)
Daytime Running Lamps 1 (DRL)
Auxiliary Stoplamp
Fuel Operated Heater Module
(Diesel)
Fuel System Control Module
Battery (Gas)
Left Stoplamp, Trailer Turn Signal
Canister Vent Solenoid (Gas)
Empty
Empty
Empty
Instrument Panel Cluster
Empty
11
12
13
Brake Switch
Auxiliary Power Outlet
Airbag
14
15
Trailer Wiring
Steering Wheel Sensor (Gas)
Body Control Module 2
Cigarette Lighter, Data Link
Controller
Windshield Wiper
Empty
Windshield Washer
Empty
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
38
39
40
41
42
43
Empty
Body Control Module 1
Special Equipment Option (SEO)
Body Control Module 4
Body Control Module 6
Empty
Body Control Module 7
Body Control Module 3
Body Control Module 5
Horn
Transmission Control Module
Battery
44
45
46
Empty
Oxygen Sensor 1 (Gas)
5-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuse
Usage
Fuse
Usage
Transmission Control Module
Ignition
Engine Control Module Ignition
Mass Airflow Sensor, Canister Vent
Engine Control Module, Powertrain
Transmission
Even Ignition Injectors (Gas)
Glow Plug Module (Diesel)
Engine Control Module Battery
Odd Ignition Injectors (Gas)
Oxygen Sensor 2 (Gas)
Air Conditioning Compressor
Fan Clutch (Diesel)
V6 Fuel Injectors (Gas)
Antilock Brake System Module
(J-Case)
Antilock Brake System Motor
(J-Case)
64
Starter Solenoid (J-Case)
Engine Control Module (ECM),
Powertrain (Diesel) (J-Case)
Front Blower (J-Case)
Empty
Body BEC (Mega Fuse)
47
65
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
66
67
77
Relays
68
69
Usage
Empty
Run, Crank (High Current Micro)
Windshield Wiper High
(High Current Micro)
Windshield Wiper
(High Current Micro)
Fuel Pump (Mini Micro)
Crank (High Current Micro)
70
71
72
73
60
61
Air Conditioning Compressor
(Mini Micro)
74
75
76
Fan Clutch (Diesel) (Solid State)
Powertrain (High Current Micro)
62
63
Trailer Wiring (J-Case)
Empty
5-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-13 for more information. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level or as recommended
in this manual.
See refrigerant charge label under the hood for charge capacity information and requirements.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
4300 V6
11.0 qt
13.4 qt
14.8 qt
10.4 L
12.7 L
14.0 L
4800 V8, 5300 V8
6000 V8
Cooling System with Rear Heat
4300 V6
14.0 qt
16.4 qt
17.8 qt
13.2 L
15.5 L
17.0 L
4800 V8, 5300 V8
6000 V8
Engine Oil with Filter
4300 V6
4.5 qt
6.0 qt
4.3 L
5.7 L
4800 V8, 5300 V8, 6000 V8
5-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Fuel Tank
Standard Tank (Passenger and Cargo)
Standard Tank (Cab and Chassis)
Optional Tank (Cab and Chassis)*
31.0 gal
33.0 gal
57.0 gal
117.3 L
124.9 L
215.7 L
* 159 inch (4 039 mm) wheelbase or 177 inch (4 496 mm) wheelbase only
Transmission Capacities
4-SPD 4L60-E Transmission
4-SPD 4L80-E
4-SPD 4L80-E Heavy Duty Transmission
Wheel Nut Torque
5.0 qt
7.7 qt
7.7 qt
4.7 L
7.3 L
7.3 L
140 ft lb
190 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Spark Plug Gap
VORTEC™ 4300 V6
VORTEC™ 4800 V8
VORTEC™ 5300 V8
VORTEC™ 6000 V8
X
C
4
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
K
5-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance Schedule
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered
by warranty.
Introduction
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a
gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine,
see the maintenance schedule section in the
DURAMAX® Diesel manual.
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and
to keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure to
maintain your vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your
dealer/retailer for details.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Maintenance Footnotes (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-8
for further information.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all the
time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work,
to do errands, or in many other ways.
{CAUTION:
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your dealer/retailer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing Your Own
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your
dealer/retailer do these jobs.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-6.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service technicians who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-15. When your vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a
gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see
the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX®
Diesel manual.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on within
10 months since the vehicle was purchased or
Maintenance II was performed.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
comes on, it means that service is required for your
vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that,
if you are driving under the best conditions, the engine oil
life system may not indicate that vehicle service is
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Control Service.
•
•
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
on page 6-10.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
•
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Inspect shields, vehicles with GVWR above 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) only.
See footnote (g).
•
•
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (m).
Additional Required Services (Gasoline Engine)
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see the
maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX® Diesel manual.
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service). See
footnote (h).
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (n).
•
•
Inspect evaporative control system.
An Emission Control Service. See
footnotes † and (k).
•
•
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
Maintenance Footnotes
(Gasoline Engine)
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a
gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see
the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX®
Diesel manual.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
page 5-104 for more information.
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge
that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed
safety belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint
# Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings,
steering linkage, and rear driveline center splines.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood hinges, hood
prop rod pivot, hood latch assembly, secondary latch,
pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, rear compartment
hinges, latches, locks, fuel door hinge, and any moving
seat hardware. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will
make them last longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts,
signs of wear, or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(g) Vehicles with Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
above 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) only: Inspect shields for
damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as required.
This is a Noise Emission Control Service. Applicable to
vehicles sold in the United States and recommended
for vehicles sold in Canada.
(k) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and condition. Check
that the purge valve works properly, if equipped.
Replace as needed.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
(m) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise
control cables.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
Owner Checks and Services
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000
Miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km)
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
For vehicles with dual wheels, check dual wheel
nut torque. For proper torque, see Capacities and
At Least Once a Month
At Each Fuel Fill
Tire Inflation Check
Inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
page 5-64. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-71.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
on page 5-15.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-24.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
on page 2-28.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves
out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and the transmission
in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle
is held by the parking brake only.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
{CAUTION:
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-24.
Engine Coolant
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a
gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see
the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX®
Diesel manual.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets
GM Standard GM6094M and
displays the American Petroleum
Institute Certified for Gasoline
Engines starburst symbol. To
determine the proper viscosity for
your vehicle’s engine, see Engine
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
Canada 89021186).
Power Steering
System
Engine Oil
Automatic
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
Usage
One-Piece
Fluid/Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Wheel bearing lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2,
Category GC or GC-LB
(GM Part No. U.S. 1051344, in
Canada 993037).
Propshaft Slip Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
Yoke Spline, (GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in
Chassis
Lubrication
Two-Piece
Propshaft
Slip-in-Tube
Spline
Canada 10953511) or lubricant
meeting requirements of
GM 9985830.
Front Wheel
Bearings
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hood Hinges (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Axle Lubricant
Front and Rear
Axle
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in
Canada 89021678) or equivalent
meeting GM Specification 9986115.
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
Manual Transmission Fluid
Transfer Case (GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,
in Canada 88861801).
Synthetic Grease with
Weatherstrip Teflon, Superlube
Squeaks
(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287, in
Canada 10953437).
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained by your dealer/retailer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
4300 V6
4800 V8, 5300 V8, 6000 V8
Spark Plugs
15950115
—
25010792
89017524
PF47
PF48
4300 V6
4800 V8, 5300 V8, 6000 V8
12607234
12571164
41-993
41-985
Wiper Blades
22 inches (56.0 cm)
15214346
—
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Assistance and
Information
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be
resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern
has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following
steps should be taken:
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if
you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
by calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact General
Motors of Canada Customer Communication Centre by
calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
Mediation/Arbitration Program. General Motors of
Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of
owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may
include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The
program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in about 70 days. We
believe our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,
and free of charge.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you may call the
General Motors Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or
you may write to:
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage,
and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be
aware of its participation in a no-charge
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe
to E-News and use tools and forms with
greater ease.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gmcanada.com.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can
communicate with Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.)
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
Customer Assistance Offices
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Roadside Assistance Program
For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone
(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program.
Who is Covered?
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person
driving this vehicle without the consent of the owner is
not eligible for coverage.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Services Provided
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in
good condition, when equipped and properly
inflated, is covered at no charge. The customer is
responsible for the repair or replacement of the
tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up
to a maximum coverage of $100.
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in Canada). In Canada, service
to provide diesel may be restricted. For safety
reasons, propane and other alternative fuels will not
be provided through this service.
charge if the vehicle does not start.
• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon
request, Roadside Assistance will send you
detailed, computer personalized maps, highlighting
your choice of either the most direct route or the
most scenic route to your destination, anywhere in
North America, along with helpful travel information
pertaining to your trip.
• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will be covered
at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if
you have an active OnStar® subscription. To ensure
security, the driver must present personal
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. Trip routing requests will be limited
to six per calendar year.
identification before lock-out service is provided. In
Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling crash. Winch-out assistance is
provided when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud,
or snow.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.
However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warranty
repairs are the responsibility of the driver.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance
(Canada only): In the event of a warranty related
vehicle disablement, while en route and over
250 kilometres from the original point of departure,
you may qualify for trip interruption expense
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable
reimbursement of up to a maximum of $500
(Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of $50/day),
(B) lodging (maximum of $100/night) and
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement to
an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion, the
claims become excessive in frequency or type of
occurrence.
Calling for Assistance
(C) alternate ground transportation (maximum of
$40/day). This benefit is to assist you with some of
the unplanned expense you may incur while waiting
for your vehicle to be repaired.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts and a
copy of the repair order are required.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
Once authorization has been given, your advisor will
help you make any necessary arrangements and
explain how to claim for trip interruption expense
assistance.
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There may be
times, when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you will be
reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Roadside Assistance.
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early
in the work day as possible to allow for the same
day repair.
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated
on a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound
towing caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State,
Provincial, or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty in
both the U.S. and Canada.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the
Roadside Assistance program at any time without
notification.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered by
appropriate dealer personnel.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at
its sole discretion.
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known. Such
parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by that
warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Repair Facility
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice
to ensure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle
Warranty.
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM
vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by
using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you
assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is
not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are
all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one
else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash. Do
not discuss your personal condition, mental frame of
mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
help guard against post-crash legal action.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
page 7-6 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are drivable.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying General Motors.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington D.C., 20590
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner Information
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
modules may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use.
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Door Unlock ...................................... 2-8
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraints (cont.)
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses (cont.)
F
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps (cont.)
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mirrors (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service (cont.)
S
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
T
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warnings (cont.)
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-76
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
